Toshiba Rav Sm800ut E User Manual

FILE NO. A02-014  
Revised 3/June/2004  
SERVICE MANUAL  
SPLIT TYPE  
RAV-SM560AT-E/RAV-SM800AT-E  
RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E  
RAV-SM560BT-E/RAV-SM800BT-E  
RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM800KRT-E  
RAV-SM560XT-E/RAV-SM800XT-E  
R410A  
PRINTED IN JAPAN, June,2004 ToMo  
1. SPECIFICATIONS  
1-1. Indoor Unit  
1-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType  
Model name  
RAV-SM560UT-E  
Heating Average Cooling  
RAV-SM800UT-E  
Heating Average  
Cooling  
Standard capacity (Note 1)  
(kW)  
5.3  
5.6  
7.1  
8.0  
(1.5 – 5.6)  
(1.5 – 6.3)  
(2.2 – 8.0)  
(2.2–9.0)  
Heating low temp. capacity (Note 1) (kW)  
Energy consumption effect ratio (Cooling)  
Power supply  
4.9  
7
3.01 [B]  
3.90 [A]  
3.46  
3.03 [B]  
3.45 [B]  
3.24  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
(A)  
(kW)  
(kW)  
(%)  
8.42–7.72  
1.76  
6.78–6.29  
1.435  
11.32–10.37 11.22–10.28  
Electrical  
Power consumption  
characteristics  
2.34  
94  
2.32  
(Low temp.)  
Power factor  
Main unit  
1.89  
2.73  
95  
95  
94  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
RBC-U21PG (W) E  
Ceiling Panel  
(Sold separately)  
Moon-white (Muncel 2.5GY 9.0/0.5)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
256  
840  
840  
53  
Main unit  
Depth  
Outer  
dimension  
Height  
Width  
Ceiling panel  
(Sold separately)  
950  
950  
Depth  
Main unit  
21  
22  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel  
4.5  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tubu  
Soundproof/Heat-insulating material  
Fan  
Inflammable polyethylene foam  
Turbo fan  
Foamed polyethylen  
1200  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow High (Mid./Low) (m³/h)  
1050  
Motor  
(W)  
60  
Air filter  
Attached ceiling panel  
RBC-AMT21E  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 (1/2”)  
Ø6.4 (1/4”)  
Ø15.9 (5/8”)  
Ø9.5 (3/8”)  
Connecting  
Liquid side  
pipe  
Drain port  
(Nominal dia.)  
(dB•A)  
25 (Polyvinyl chloride tube)  
27 34  
Sound level  
High (Mid./Low) (Note 2)  
32  
29  
31  
28  
Note 1 : The cooling capacities and electrical characteristics are measured under the conditions speciied by JIS B 8616 based  
on the reference piping. The reference piping consists of 3 m of main piping and 2 m of branch piping connected with 0  
meter height.  
Note 2 : The sound level is measured in an anechoic chamber in accordance with JIS B8616. Normally, the values measured in  
the actual operating environment become larger than the indicated values due to the effects of external sound.  
Note : Rated conditions  
Cooling : Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DB  
Heating : Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WB  
– 3 –  
• Operation characteristic curve  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
14  
16  
14  
12  
10  
12  
RAV-SM800UT-E  
RAV-SM800UT-E  
10  
8
6
8
6
RAV-SM560UT-E  
4
2
0
RAV-SM560UT-E  
4
2
Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Outdoor : DB35 C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20 C  
Outdoor : DB7 C/WB6 C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
15 20  
40  
60 70 80  
100  
1520  
40  
60  
80 90 100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
105  
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Indoor : DB20 C  
55  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
50  
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
– 4 –  
1-1-2. Concealed Duct Type  
Model name  
RAV-SM560BT-E  
Heating Average Cooling  
RAV-SM800BT-E  
Heating Average  
Cooling  
Standard capacity (Note 1)  
(kW)  
5
5.6  
7.1  
8
(1.5 – 5.6)  
(1.5 – 6.3)  
(2.2 – 8.0)  
(2.2–9.0)  
Heating low temp. capacity (Note 1) (kW)  
Energy consumption effect ratio (Cooling)  
Power supply  
4.6  
6.2  
2.60 [D]  
3.27 [C]  
2.94  
2.73 [D]  
3.21 [C]  
2.97  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
(A)  
(kW)  
(kW)  
(%)  
9.19–8.42  
1.92  
8.18–7.50  
1.71  
12.57–11.52 12.04–11.04  
Electrical  
Power consumption  
characteristics  
2.6  
2.49  
(Low temp.)  
Power factor  
Main unit  
1.78  
2.62  
95  
95  
94  
94  
Zinc hot dipping steel plate  
Appearance  
Model  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
——  
——  
Ceiling Panel  
(Sold separately)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
320  
Main unit  
700  
Depth  
800 (+7.5)  
——  
Outer  
dimension  
Height  
Width  
Ceiling panel  
——  
(Sold separately)  
Depth  
——  
Main unit  
39  
53  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel  
——  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tubu  
Soundproof/Heat-insulating material  
Fan  
Inflammable polyethylene foam  
Turbo fan  
Foamed polyethylen  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow High (Mid./Low) (m³/h)  
840  
60  
1140  
100  
Motor  
(W)  
Air filter  
Attached main unit  
RBC-AMT21E  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 (1/2”)  
Ø6.4 (1/4”)  
Ø15.9 (5/8”)  
Ø9.5 (3/8”)  
Connecting  
Liquid side  
pipe  
Drain port  
(Nominal dia.)  
(dB•A)  
25 (Polyvinyl chloride tube)  
36 43  
Sound level  
High (Mid./Low) (Note 2)  
42  
39  
40  
37  
Note 1 : The cooling capacities and electrical characteristics are measured under the conditions speciied by JIS B 8616 based  
on the reference piping. The reference piping consists of 3 m of main piping and 2 m of branch piping connected with 0  
meter height.  
Note 2 : The sound level is measured in an anechoic chamber in accordance with JIS B8616. Normally, the values measured in  
the actual operating environment become larger than the indicated values due to the effects of external sound.  
Note : Rated conditions  
Cooling : Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DB  
Heating : Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WB  
– 5 –  
Operation characteristic curve  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
14  
16  
14  
12  
10  
12  
RAV-SM800BT-E  
RAV-SM800BT-E  
10  
8
8
6
6
RAV-SM560BT-E  
4
2
0
RAV-SM560BT-E  
4
2
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Outdoor : DB35 C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20 C  
Outdoor : DB7 C/WB6 C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
15 20  
40  
60 70 80  
100  
1520  
40  
60  
80 90 100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
105  
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Indoor : DB20 C  
55  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
50  
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
– 6 –  
1-1-3. High-Wall Type  
Model name  
RAV-SM560KRT-E  
Heating Average Cooling  
RAV-SM800KRT-E  
Heating Average  
Cooling  
Standard capacity (Note 1)  
(kW)  
5.1  
5.6  
6.7  
8
(1.5 – 5.6)  
(1.5 – 6.3)  
(2.2 – 8.0)  
(2.2–9.0)  
Heating low temp. capacity (Note 1) (kW)  
Energy consumption effect ratio (Cooling)  
Power supply  
4.9  
5.8  
2.93 [D]  
3.29 [C]  
3.11  
2.46 [E]  
3.00 [D]  
3.24  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
(A)  
(kW)  
(kW)  
(%)  
8.33–7.63  
1.74  
8.138–7.46  
1.7  
13.15–12.05 12.91–11.84  
Electrical  
Power consumption  
characteristics  
2.72  
2.67  
(Low temp.)  
Power factor  
Main unit  
1.95  
2.21  
95  
95  
94  
94  
Pure white  
Appearance  
Model  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
——  
——  
Ceiling Panel  
(Sold separately)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
298  
Main unit  
998  
Depth  
208  
Outer  
dimension  
Height  
Width  
——  
Ceiling panel  
——  
(Sold separately)  
Depth  
——  
Main unit  
12  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel  
——  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tubu  
Soundproof/Heat-insulating material  
Fan  
Inflammable polyethylene foam  
Turbo fan  
Foamed polyethylen  
1110  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow High (Mid./Low) (m³/h)  
840  
Motor  
(W)  
30  
Air filter  
Attached main unit  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Gas side  
Wired remote controller RBC-AMT21E  
(mm)  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 (1/2”)  
Ø15.9 (5/8”)  
Ø9.5 (3/8”)  
Connecting  
Liquid side  
pipe  
Ø6.4 (1/4”)  
41  
Drain port  
(Nominal dia.)  
(dB•A)  
25 (Polyvinyl chloride tube)  
36 45  
Sound level  
High (Mid./Low) (Note 2)  
45  
41  
36  
Note 1 : The cooling capacities and electrical characteristics are measured under the conditions speciied by JIS B 8616 based  
on the reference piping. The reference piping consists of 3 m of main piping and 2 m of branch piping connected with 0  
meter height.  
Note 2 : The sound level is measured in an anechoic chamber in accordance with JIS B8616. Normally, the values measured in  
the actual operating environment become larger than the indicated values due to the effects of external sound.  
Note : Rated conditions  
Cooling : Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DB  
Heating : Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WB  
– 7 –  
• Operation characteristic curve  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
14  
16  
14  
12  
10  
12  
RAV-SM800KRT-E  
RAV-SM800KRT-E  
10  
8
8
6
6
RAV-SM560KRT-E  
4
2
0
RAV-SM560KRT-E  
4
2
Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Outdoor : DB35 C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20 C  
Outdoor : DB7 C/WB6 C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
15 20  
40  
60 70 80  
100  
1520  
40  
60  
80 90 100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
105  
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Indoor : DB20 C  
55  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
50  
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
– 8 –  
1-1-4. Flexible Type  
Model name  
RAV-SM560XT-E  
Heating Average Cooling  
RAV-SM800XT-E  
Heating Average  
Cooling  
Standard capacity (Note 1)  
(kW)  
5.1  
5.6  
6.7  
8
(1.5 – 5.6)  
(1.5 – 6.3)  
(2.2 – 8.0)  
(2.2–9.0)  
Heating low temp. capacity (Note 1) (kW)  
Energy consumption effect ratio (Cooling)  
Power supply  
4.9  
5.8  
2.93 [D]  
3.29 [C]  
3.11  
2.46 [E]  
3.00 [D]  
3.24  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
Running current  
(A)  
(kW)  
(kW)  
(%)  
8.33–7.63  
1.74  
8.138–7.46  
1.7  
13.15–12.05 12.91–11.84  
Electrical  
Power consumption  
characteristics  
2.72  
2.67  
(Low temp.)  
Power factor  
Main unit  
1.95  
2.21  
95  
95  
94  
94  
Pure white  
Appearance  
Model  
Panel color  
Height  
Width  
——  
——  
Ceiling Panel  
(Sold separately)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
298  
Main unit  
998  
Depth  
208  
Outer  
dimension  
Height  
Width  
——  
Ceiling panel  
——  
(Sold separately)  
Depth  
——  
Main unit  
12  
Total weight  
Ceiling panel  
——  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tubu  
Soundproof/Heat-insulating material  
Fan  
Inflammable polyethylene foam  
Cross flow fan  
Foamed polyethylen  
1110  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow High (Mid./Low) (m³/h)  
840  
Motor  
(W)  
30  
Air filter  
Attached main unit  
Controller (Sold separately)  
Gas side  
Wired remote controller RBC-AMT21E  
(mm)  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 (1/2”)  
Ø15.9 (5/8”)  
Ø9.5 (3/8”)  
Connecting  
Liquid side  
pipe  
Ø6.4 (1/4”)  
Drain port  
(Nominal dia.)  
(dB•A)  
25 (Polyvinyl chloride tube)  
36 45  
Sound level  
High (Mid./Low) (Note 2)  
39  
36  
41  
36  
Note 1 : The cooling capacities and electrical characteristics are measured under the conditions speciied by JIS B 8616 based  
on the reference piping. The reference piping consists of 3 m of main piping and 2 m of branch piping connected with 0  
meter height.  
Note 2 : The sound level is measured in an anechoic chamber in accordance with JIS B8616. Normally, the values measured in  
the actual operating environment become larger than the indicated values due to the effects of external sound.  
Note : Rated conditions  
Cooling : Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DB  
Heating : Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WB  
– 9 –  
Operation characteristic curve  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
14  
14  
12  
10  
12  
RAV-SM800XT-E  
RAV-SM800XT-E  
10  
8
8
6
6
RAV-SM560XT-E  
4
2
0
RAV-SM560XT-E  
4
2
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Outdoor : DB35 C  
Air flow : High  
Indoor : DB20 C  
Outdoor : DB7 C/WB6 C  
Air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
230V  
0
0
0
15 20  
40  
60 70 80  
100  
1520  
40  
60  
80 90 100  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Compressor speed (rps)  
Capacity variation ratio according to temperature  
<Cooling>  
<Heating>  
120  
110  
100  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
105  
100  
95  
90  
85  
80  
75  
70  
65  
60  
• Conditions  
• Conditions  
Indoor : DB27 C/WB19 C  
Indoor : DB20 C  
55  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
Indoor air flow : High  
Pipe length : 7.5m  
50  
-14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
Outsoor temp. ( C)  
– 10 –  
1-2. Outdoor Unit  
Model name  
Appearance  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)  
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz  
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)  
Power supply  
Type  
Hermetic compressor  
Compressor  
Motor  
Pole  
(kW)  
(kg)  
1.1  
1.6  
4 poles  
Refrigerant charged  
Refrigerant control  
R410A 0.9  
R410A 1.5  
Pulse motor valve  
Standard length  
20 (without additional charge)  
Max. total length  
Over 20m  
(m)  
30  
50  
Pipe  
Add 20g/m (Max. 200g)  
Add 40g/m (Max. 1200g)  
Outdoor lower  
Outdoor higher  
(m)  
(m)  
30  
50  
Height difference  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(mm)  
(kg)  
595  
780  
270  
35  
795  
780  
270  
55  
Outer  
dimension  
Total weight  
Heat exchanger  
Finned tube  
Propeller fan  
Fan  
Fan unit  
Standard air flow High  
Motor  
(m³/h)  
(W)  
2400  
43  
3400  
63  
Gas side  
(mm)  
(mm)  
Ø12.7 (1/2”)  
Ø6.4 (1/4”)  
Ø15.9 (5/8”)  
Ø9.5 (3/8”)  
Connecting  
pipe  
Liquid side  
Discharge temp. sensor  
Over-current sensor  
Compressor thermo.  
Protection device  
Sound level  
(Note 2)  
High (Mid./Low)  
(Cooling/Heating)  
(dB•A)  
46/48  
45/50  
Note 1 : The cooling capacities and electrical characteristics are measured under the conditions speciied by JIS B 8616 based  
on the reference piping. The reference piping consists of 3 m piping connected with 0 meter height.  
Note 2 : The sound level is measured in an anechoic chamber in accordance with JIS B8616. Normally, the values measured in  
the actual operating environment become larger than the indicated values due to the effects of external sound.  
Note : Rated conditions  
Cooling : Indoor air temperature 27°C DB/19°C WB, Outdoor air temperature 35°C DB  
Heating : Indoor air temperature 20°C DB, Outdoor air temperature 7°C DB/6°C WB  
– 11 –  
2. AIR DUCTING WORK  
2-1. Static Pressure Characteristics of Each Model  
Fig. 1 RAV-SM560BT-E  
70% (570m³/h)  
110% (925m³/h)  
Standard air volume : 840m³/h  
12  
11  
Extra HHigh tap  
10  
9
8
High tap  
7
6
Middloeletatpap  
5
4
3
Low tap  
2
1
0
500  
570 600  
700  
800  
900 925  
1000  
Air volume (m³/hr.)  
Fig. 2 RAV-SM800BT-E  
Standard air volume : 1140m³/h  
70% (800m³/h)  
110% (1255m³/h)  
12  
11  
10  
9
Extra HHigh tap  
8
High tap  
7
6
Middoleletatapp  
5
4
3
Low tap  
2
1
0
700  
800  
900  
1000  
1100  
1200 1255  
1300  
Air volume (m³/hr.)  
– 12 –  
3. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)  
3-1. Indoor Unit  
4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E  
200  
860 to 910 Recommended external size  
Check port  
(
450)  
Check port  
450)  
(
Standing  
850 or less  
Surface  
under ceiling  
Standing  
640 or less  
30  
Cable draw-in port  
Surface  
under ceiling  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port A  
270  
250  
Indoor unit  
Refrigerant pipe  
Drain up standing size  
70  
connecting port B  
Hanging bolt M10 or W3/8  
Procured locally  
950 Panel external dimension  
790 Hanging bolt pitch  
346.5  
130  
256  
88  
Electric  
Surface  
under ceiling  
parts box  
150  
Knockout  
for  
humidifier  
Ceiling  
panel  
(Sold  
separately)  
105  
Surface  
under ceiling  
254.5  
120 97  
35  
840 Hanging bolt  
480  
227  
A
B
Z view  
SM560  
SM800  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
Ø12.7  
Ø15.9  
Surface under ceiling  
Surface under ceiling  
– 13 –  
Concealed Duct Type  
RAV-SM560BT-E  
750 7.5 Hanging bolt pitch  
700 Dimension of main unit  
170  
120  
2-Ø200  
Discharge port flange  
20  
4-M10  
Hanging bolt  
(Procured locally)  
Drain up kit  
(Sold separately)  
280  
252  
70  
60  
80  
For hanging bolt M10  
(4-12 x 25 long hole)  
730  
780 Ceiling opening size  
75  
800 Dimension of main unit  
565 Hanging bolt pitch  
210  
25  
Drain pipe connecting port  
at drain up kit side  
(For polyvinyl chloride pipe  
(Inner dia. 32, Nominal dia. 25))  
720  
240  
314.5  
509  
630  
300  
211  
Ø125 knockout hole (Only rear side)  
(For air suction)  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
(Gas side Ø12.7)  
45  
130  
80  
6-Ø4 tapping screw lower hole Ø160  
25  
80  
170  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
(Liquid side Ø6.4)  
Suction port canvas  
Suction panel  
Drain pipe connecting port  
at main unit side  
(For polyvinyl chloride pipe  
(Inner dia. 32, Nominal dia. 25))  
Panel  
450  
470 Ceiling opening size  
2-Ø26 power supply remote  
controller cord draw-out port  
Check port A  
450  
Plane view of main unit  
(Pipe side)  
NOTE 1 :  
For maintenance of the equipment, be sure to install  
a check port A at the position as shown below.  
NOTE 2 :  
Using the drain up kit sold separately, drain-up by 300 (mm)  
from drain pipe draw-out port of the main unit is necessary.  
The drain-up over 300mm or more is impossible.  
Discharge side  
– 14 –  
RAV-SM800BT-E  
1050 7.5 Hanging bolt pitch  
1000 Dimension of main unit  
2-Ø200  
170  
120  
Discharge port flange  
20  
252  
4-M10  
Hanging bolt  
(Procured locally)  
Drain up kit  
(Sold separately)  
290  
290  
70  
60  
80  
For hanging bolt M10  
(4-12 x 25 long hole)  
1030  
1050 Ceiling opening size  
75  
800 Dimension of main unit  
565 Hanging bolt pitch  
210  
25  
Drain pipe connecting port  
at drain up kit side  
(For polyvinyl chloride pipe  
(Inner dia. 32, Nominal dia. 25))  
720  
240  
314.5  
509  
630  
300  
211  
Ø125 knockout hole (Only rear side)  
(For air suction)  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
(Gas side Ø12.7)  
45  
130  
80  
6-Ø4 tapping screw lower hole Ø160  
25  
80  
170  
Refrigerant pipe  
connecting port  
(Liquid side Ø6.4)  
Suction port canvas  
Suction panel  
Drain pipe connecting port  
at main unit side  
(For polyvinyl chloride pipe  
(Inner dia. 32, Nominal dia. 25))  
Panel  
450  
470 Ceiling opening size  
2-Ø26 power supply remote  
controller cord draw-out port  
Check port A  
450  
Plane view of main unit  
(Pipe side)  
NOTE 1 :  
For maintenance of the equipment, be sure to install  
a check port A at the position as shown below.  
NOTE 2 :  
Using the drain up kit sold separately, drain-up by 300 (mm)  
from drain pipe draw-out port of the main unit is necessary.  
The drain-up over 300mm or more is impossible.  
Discharge side  
– 15 –  
High-Wall Type  
RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM800KRT-E  
998  
Z
51  
50  
Pipe port from right  
Discharge port  
Suction port  
Pipe port from left  
(Knockout hole)  
(Knockout hole)  
75 56  
Pipe port from lower side  
(Knockout hole)  
Z views  
Drain hose  
110  
390  
490  
540  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port B  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port A  
998  
763.5  
450  
20  
20  
115  
100  
100  
115  
Position of installation plate  
A
B
Liquid Side Gas Side  
SM560  
SM800  
Ø6.4  
Ø9.5  
Ø12.7  
Ø15.9  
53 or more  
53 or more  
Space required for service  
– 16 –  
Under Ceiling/Console Type  
RAV-SM560XT-E/RAV-SM800XT-E  
Front panel  
208  
1093  
Knock out system  
Grille air inlet  
Back body  
200 Min  
1093  
1015  
742  
For stud bolt  
Installation plate  
Mount plate  
(Ø8 – Ø10)  
For stud bolt (Ø6)  
450  
20  
20  
M10 Suspention bolt  
74  
Ø
57  
Wireless remote control  
Knock out system  
18  
UNDER CEILING & CONSOLE INSTALLATION  
– 17 –  
3-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
Drain hole (2-Ø20 x 88 long hole)  
Drain hole (Ø25)  
83  
600  
97  
A legs  
115.3 125  
30  
780  
B legs  
Discharge guard  
Discharge guide mounting hole  
(4-Ø4 embossing)  
115.3  
216  
49.5  
147  
Valve cover  
31  
23  
Earth  
terminal  
25  
220  
500 (Fan center dividing)  
Charge port  
31  
134  
Protective net mounting hole  
(2-Ø4 embossing)  
43  
707  
30  
Protective net mounting hole  
(4-Ø4 embossing)  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
(Ø12.7 flare at gas side)  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
(Ø6.4 flare at liquid side)  
Space required for service  
600  
Ø11 x 14 U-  
shape holes  
2-Ø11 x 14 U-shape holes  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
600  
Suction port  
52  
36  
2-Ø6 hole  
Product  
external  
line  
R15  
2-Ø6 hole  
300  
or more  
150  
R15  
600  
36  
52  
or more  
Product  
external line  
Ø11 x 14 U-shape hole  
Discharge  
(Minimum  
distance up to wall)  
port  
500  
Discharge  
port  
Details of A legs  
Details of B legs  
2-Ø11 x 14 long hole  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
or more  
– 18 –  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
Knockout  
(For draining) Drain hole (Ø20 x 88 burring hole)  
Drain hole (Ø25 burring hole)  
Installation bolt hole  
(Ø12 x 17 U-shape holes)  
29  
90  
191  
Suction  
port  
20  
Part B  
Suction  
port  
Details of B part  
Details of A part  
Knockout  
(For draining)  
Discharge  
port  
43  
26 60  
150  
Part A  
95  
300  
900  
Installation bolt hole  
(Ø12 x 17 U-shape holes)  
314  
Handles  
(Both sides)  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
(Ø9.5 flare at liquid side)  
Refrigerant pipe connecting port  
(Ø15.9 flare at gas side)  
2
60 27  
96  
1
Z
Discharge guide  
mounting hole  
(4-Ø4 embossing)  
300  
307  
Knockout for lower piping  
86  
7
28  
320  
Z views  
Space required for service  
2-Ø12 x 17 U-shape holes  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
600  
2
46  
Suction port  
1
150  
or more  
150  
or more  
Discharge  
(Minimum  
distance up to wall)  
port  
58  
161  
27  
30  
45  
1
2
500  
Discharge  
port  
2-Ø12 x 17 long hole  
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)  
or more  
400  
– 19 –  
4. SYSTEMATIC REFRIGERATING CYCLE DIAGRAM  
Indoor Unit/Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM560UT-E, RAV-SM560BT-E, RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM560AT-E  
Indoor unit  
TCJ  
sensor  
Air heat exchanger  
TC sensor  
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe  
Gas side ØA  
Liquid side ØB  
12.7mm  
6.4mm  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
Outer dia. ØB  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
Outer dia. ØA  
Max  
30m  
Packed valve  
Outer dia. ØB  
Packed valve  
Outer dia. ØA  
Outdoor unit  
PMV  
(SKV-18D26)  
TS sensor  
TO sensor  
TD sensor  
Strainer  
4-way valve  
(VT7101D)  
TE  
sensor  
Heat exchanger  
Muffler  
Ø8 multiple thread  
ripple 1 row 22 stages  
FP1.3 flat fin  
Ø19 × L160  
Distributor  
Rotary compressor  
(DA130A1F-23F)  
R410A 0.9 kg  
Cooling  
Heating  
Pressure  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
revolutions per  
second (rps)  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat  
exchanger exchanger  
Indoor  
fan  
(MPa)  
(kg/cm²G)  
Pd Ps  
Discharge  
Suction  
Pd  
Ps  
(TD)  
85  
(TS)  
15  
20  
7
(TC)  
10  
15  
3
(TE)  
50  
57  
5
*
74  
72  
28  
84  
47  
110  
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
3.1  
3.6  
0.9  
2.3  
3.3  
1.7  
0.9 31.9 8.9  
1.0 37.1 10.4  
HIGH  
HIGH  
27/19  
32/24  
35/–  
43/–  
93  
0.7  
9.1 7.1  
20  
LOW 18/15.5  
–5/–  
Standard  
0.6 23.6 6.2  
1.2 33.2 11.8  
0.2 16.4 1.8  
71  
1
39  
54  
26  
3
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
20/–  
30.–  
15/–  
7/6  
Heating Overload  
Low load  
78  
20  
–20  
19  
–22  
24/18  
–20/(70%)  
110  
4 poles are provided to this compressor.  
*
The compressor frequency (Hz) measured with a clamp meter is 2 times of revolutions (rps) of the compressor.  
– 20 –  
Indoor Unit/Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM800UT-E, RAV-SM800BT-E, RAV-SM800KRT-E/RAV-SM800AT-E  
Indoor unit  
TCJ  
sensor  
Air heat exchanger  
TC sensor  
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe  
Gas side ØA  
Liquid side ØB  
15.9mm  
9.5mm  
Refrigerant pipe  
at liquid side  
Outer dia. ØB  
Refrigerant pipe  
at gas side  
Outer dia. ØA  
Max  
50m  
Packed valve  
Outer dia. ØB  
Packed valve  
Outer dia. ØA  
Pd  
Ps  
Outdoor unit  
Modulating (PMV)  
(SKV-18D26)  
Strainer  
TS sensor  
TO sensor  
TD sensor  
Strainer  
TE  
4-way valve  
(STF-0213Z)  
sensor  
Capillary  
Muffler  
Accumulator  
(1500cc)  
Ø3ר2×  
Heat exchangerØ8  
1 row 30 stages  
FP1.3 flat fin  
Ø25 × L210  
L530  
Ø25 × L160  
Rotary compressor  
(DA220A2F-20L)  
R410A 1.5 kg  
Cooling  
Heating  
Pressure  
Pipe surface temperature (°C)  
Indoor/Outdoor  
temp. conditions  
(DB/WB) (°C)  
Compressor  
revolutions per  
second (rps)  
Indoor heat Outdoor heat  
exchanger exchanger  
Indoor  
fan  
(MPa)  
Pd Ps  
(kg/cm²G)  
Pd Ps  
Discharge  
Suction  
(TD)  
86  
(TS)  
11  
21  
4
(TC)  
9
(TE)  
44  
54  
8
*
Indoor Outdoor  
Standard  
Cooling Overload  
Low load  
3.3  
3.7  
1.0  
2.5  
3.4  
2.0  
0.9 33.4 8.8  
1.1 37.8 11.4  
0.8 10.0 7.9  
0.6 25.8 6.3  
1.1 34.7 11.5  
0.2 20.3 2.3  
64  
52  
27  
65  
31  
90  
HIGH  
HIGH  
27/19  
32/24  
35/–  
43/–  
90  
18  
4
19  
LOW 18/15.5  
–5/–  
Standard  
67  
6
42  
55  
34  
2
HIGH  
LOW  
HIGH  
20/–  
30.–  
15/–  
7/6  
Heating Overload  
Low load  
85  
23  
–16  
16  
–18  
24/18  
–20/(70%)  
89  
4 poles are provided to this compressor.  
*
The compressor frequency (Hz) measured with a clamp meter is 2 times of revolutions (rps) of the compressor.  
– 21 –  
5. WIRING DIAGRAM  
5-1. Indoor Unit  
4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E  
TA  
TCJ  
TC  
(EXCT)  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1
1
2
2
1 2 3  
1 2  
12  
CN70  
(WHI)  
CN34  
(RED)  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
FS  
CN104  
(YEL)  
CN102  
(RED)  
CN101  
(BLK)  
CN80  
(GRN)  
CN73  
(RED)  
5
4
3
2
1
CN620  
(BLU)  
MCC-1402  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
LM1  
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN33  
(WHI)  
CN60  
(WHI)  
Control P.C. Board for  
Indoor Unit  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN32  
(WHI)  
2
1
DC20V  
DC15V  
DC12V  
DC7V  
(FAN DRIVE)  
6
5
4
3
2
1
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
Power  
supply  
circuit  
CN61  
(YEL)  
LM2  
Fuse  
F302  
T3.15A  
250V~  
CN333  
(WHI)  
5
4
3
2
1
CN50  
(WHI)  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
Motor  
drive  
BLK  
WHI  
CN001  
(WHI)  
2 2  
1 1  
circuit  
FM  
Motor  
drive  
circuit  
CN334  
(WHI)  
3
2
1
Adapter for  
Wireless Remote  
Controller  
CN309  
(YEL)  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
BLK  
BLK  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN41  
(BLU)  
B
A
CN1  
(WHI)  
2 2  
1 1  
Fuse  
F301  
RY  
RY  
303  
BLK  
302  
250V~  
WHI  
P301  
BLK  
T6.3A  
CN68  
(BLU)  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
CN304  
(GRY)  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2  
CN66  
(WHI)  
Wired Renote  
Controller  
CN67  
(BLK)  
RED WHI BLK  
RED  
WHI  
Closed-end  
connector  
DP  
1 2 3  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
Color  
NOTE  
Identification  
BLK : BLACK  
BLU : BLUE  
FM : Fan motor  
1 2 3  
TA : Indoor temp. sensor  
TC : Temp. sensor  
Outdoor unit  
earth screw  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
BRW : BROWN  
ORN : ORANGE  
YEL : YELLOW  
Serial  
L N  
signal  
TCJ : Temp. sensor  
LM1,LM2 : Louver motor  
DP : Drain pump motor  
FS : Float switch  
Single phase  
220 to 240V  
50Hz  
RY302 : Drain control relay  
– 22 –  
Concealed Duct Type  
RAV-SM560BT-E/RAV-SM800BT-E  
TA  
TCJ  
TC  
PNL  
1 2 3  
EXCT  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
1 2  
FS  
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN104 CN102 CN101  
(YEL) (RED) (BLK)  
CN080  
(GRN)  
CN073 CN070  
(RED) (WHI)  
CN030  
(RED)  
CN060  
(WHI)  
OPTION  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN032  
(WHI)  
FAN  
2
1
LM  
DRIVE  
CN033  
(GRN)  
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN061  
(YEL)  
RY001  
RY002  
CN068  
(BLU)  
3 3  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
2 2  
DP  
1 1  
CN074  
(WHI)  
TR  
UL  
YEL  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
8 8  
9 9  
1 1  
2 2  
1 1  
2 2  
6 6  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
L
RED  
YEL  
BLU  
OPN  
BLK  
3 3 BLU 3 3  
Power  
supply  
circuit  
RY005  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
8 8  
M
H
RY006  
FM  
ORN  
BLK  
CN075  
(WHI)  
BRW  
RED 9 9  
RC  
6
5
4
3
2
1
RY007  
CN083  
(WHI)  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
8 8  
9 9  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RED  
YEL  
BLU  
OPN  
BLK  
CN050  
(WHI)  
Fuse  
F001  
T5A  
RY  
004  
FM  
B
A
2
1
2
1
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN1  
250V~  
BRW  
CN041  
(BLU)  
Remote  
Controller  
1 2 3  
CN304  
(GRY)  
1 2 3  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2 3 4 5  
1 2  
CN066  
(WHI)  
CN067  
(BLK)  
CN309  
(YEL)  
(When selecting  
high-static pressure)  
RED WHI BLK  
RED  
WHI  
Closed-end  
connector  
Indoor unit  
earth screw  
1 2 3  
NOTE  
FM : Fan motor  
Color  
1 2 3  
L N  
RC : Runing capacitor  
TR : Transformer  
Identification  
BLK : BLACK  
BLU : BLUE  
LM : Louver motor  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
BRW : BROWN  
ORN : ORANGE  
YEL : YELLOW  
TA : Indoor temp. sensor  
TC, TCJ : Indoor heat exchanger sensor  
RY001 : Louver control relay  
RY002 : Drain control relay  
Outdoor unit  
earth screw  
RY005~007 : Air volume control relay  
DP : Drain pump motor  
– 23 –  
High-Wall Type  
RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM800KRT-E  
SUB-CONTROL P.C. BOARD  
2 1  
2 1  
CN12  
WHI  
CN01  
BLK  
TR  
1 1  
2 2  
Indoor unit  
Outdoor unit  
(1 Phase model)  
1 2  
1 2  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
CN63  
WHI  
CN62 CN16  
WHI  
BLU  
GRN&YEL  
Earth  
Screw  
CN  
240  
F2  
BLK  
RED  
CN230  
1
2
3
1
2
3
L
Remote Controller  
(Option)  
1 2  
1 2  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
CN61  
WHI  
Power Supply  
220/240 50Hz  
F201  
T3,15A  
250V~  
P03  
P02  
CN64  
WHI  
CN231  
N
ORG  
YEL  
BLU  
A
B
C
A
B
C
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
CN02  
WHI  
BLK  
CN223  
Serial Signal  
CN11  
WHI  
2 2  
1 1  
1 1 1 1  
2 2 2 2  
3 3 3 3  
4 4 4 4  
5 5 5 5  
6 6 6 6  
7 7 7 7  
8 8 8 8  
9 9 9 9  
10 10 10 10  
11 11 11 11  
12 12 12 12  
13 13 13 13  
14 14 14 14  
15 15 15 15  
16 16 16 16  
MCC-1370A  
Central Centroller  
Connection (Option)  
X
Y
1 1  
2 2  
CN01  
RED  
CN207  
WHI  
BLU  
6 6  
LM  
FM  
AI-NET  
P.C. BOARD  
MCC-1337  
PNK  
5 5  
YEL  
4 4  
OPG  
3 3  
RED  
2 2  
BRN  
1 1  
BLU  
6 6  
YEL  
5 5  
WHI  
4 4  
BLK  
3 3  
CN31  
CN02  
WHI  
2 2  
WHI  
RED  
1 1  
BLU  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
8 8  
9 9  
10 10  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
7 7  
8 8  
9 9  
10 10  
CN210  
WHI  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
WHI  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Control P.C. Board for  
Indoor Unit  
CN14  
WHI  
CN213  
WHI  
CN25  
2 1  
2 1  
2 1  
2 1  
2 1  
2 1  
6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1  
4 3 2 1 2 1  
CN04  
WHI  
CN05  
WHI  
CN20  
CN13  
WHI  
2 1  
CN50 CN06  
CN21  
WHI  
YEL  
WHI WHI  
TA  
TC  
TCJ  
Chack Code  
Diagnosis  
04  
08  
09  
0C  
0d  
0F  
11  
12  
97  
98  
99  
Serial Signal Error  
4-Way Valve Error  
I/D Heart Exchange Error  
TA Sensor Error  
NOTE  
F : Fuse (PCB)  
FM : Fan motor  
LM : Louver motor  
TC Sensor Error  
TA : Temperature sensor  
TC : Temperature sensor  
TCJ : Temperature sensor  
TR : Transformer  
TCJ Sensor Error  
Indoor Fan Error  
LED Detall  
D05 Orange O/D Serial Signal Input  
Indoor unit Error  
D02 Green O/D Serial Signal Output  
D13 Orange R/C Serial Signal Input  
D11 Green R/C Serial Signal Output  
LAN Comms Circuit Error  
LAN Adress Setting  
R/C Mis-Wiring  
O/D : Outdoor  
R/C : Remote Contoller  
– 24 –  
RAV-SM560XT-E/RAV-SM800XT-E  
HEAT  
EXCHANGER  
SENSOR  
(TCJ)  
SWITCH PCB  
MCC-1428B  
CN101  
1 2 3  
FOR FLOAT SWITCH  
1 2  
1 2  
(OPTION)  
When you use float  
switch you should cut J401  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
CN402  
1 2  
CN100  
CN05  
IC03  
CN03  
2 2  
1 1  
1 2  
THERMO  
SENSOR  
(TA)  
BLK  
BLK  
J401  
WHI  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
BLU  
10 10  
9 9  
8 8  
7 7  
6 6  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN25  
10 10  
9 9  
8 8  
7 7  
6 6  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
CN13  
POWER  
DC12V  
BLK  
BLK  
SUPPLY  
CIRCUIT  
HEAT  
2 2  
1 1  
CN01  
4
DC5V  
EXCHANGER  
SENSOR  
(TC)  
C02  
DB01  
2
R506  
CR502  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
CN10  
CR501  
R01  
WHI  
WHI  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
C01  
RY501  
RED  
BLK  
RED  
BLK  
BRW  
RED  
ORN  
YEL  
PNK  
BLU  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
CN07  
5
C501  
MCC-1428A  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
BLU  
PUR  
GRY  
BRW  
GRY  
YEL  
C15  
IC04  
R405  
CR401  
CN11  
FAN-MOTOR  
RY401  
LOUVER  
MOTOR  
100”C  
R507  
R09  
3
2
1
FOR DRAIN PUMP  
(OPTION)  
R21  
CN401  
FUSE  
250VAC  
R22  
3
SG01  
F01  
T6.3A  
P04  
CN23  
CN30  
CN31  
BLK  
GRN&YEL  
INDOOR  
TERMINAL  
INDOOR  
UNIT  
2
1 2 3  
BLOCK  
OUTDOOR  
UNIT  
SIMPLE CHECK POINTS FOR DIAGNOSING FAULTS  
Color  
Identification  
BRW : BROWN  
RED : RED  
Check items  
Diagnosis result  
OPERATION Check to see if OPERATION indicator goes on and off when the main switch  
1
2
3
4
5
or breaker is turned on.  
indicator  
WHI : WHITE  
YEL : YELLOW  
BLU : BLUE  
BLK : BLACK  
GRY : GRAY  
Check the power supply voltage between 1 - 2 (Refer to the name plate.)  
Chack the fluctuate voltage between 2 - 3 (DC15 to 60V)  
Terminal  
block  
Fuse  
6.3A  
Check to see if the fuse blows out. (Check the varistor. : R22, R21)  
PNK : PINK  
ORN : ORANGE  
GRN&YEL : GREEN&  
YELLOW  
Check the voltage at the No.8 pin on CN13 connector of the infrared receiver.  
(Check the transformer and the power supply circuit of the rated voltage.)  
DC 5V  
GRN : GREEN  
PUR : PURPLE  
Check the voltage at the brown lead of the louver motor.  
(Check the transformer and the power supply circuit of the rated voltage.)  
DC 12V  
– 25 –  
5-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
REACTOR  
Q200  
DB01  
THERMOSTAT  
FOR  
COMPRESSOR  
CONVERTER  
MODULE  
IGBT MODULE  
BRW  
ORN  
2 1  
2 1  
BLU  
CN500  
2 1  
2 1  
~ ~  
A E G  
P10  
+
P19  
P09  
P08  
TE  
P20  
P07  
P17 P18  
1 1  
CN600  
2 2  
TD  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
ELECTRONIC  
STARTER  
CN601  
CT  
POWER  
RELAY  
TO  
TS  
1 1  
2 2  
CN602  
CN603  
P.C. BOARD  
(MCC-813)  
3 2 1  
3 2 1  
4
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
C12  
3
C13  
C14  
RELAY  
Q300  
CM  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
CN701  
P06  
COMPRESSOR  
COIL FOR  
4-WAY VALVE  
BLK  
SURGE  
F04  
ABSORBER  
FUSE  
2
T3. 15A  
250V~  
BLK  
YEL  
RED  
ORN  
RED  
GRY  
1 1  
2 2  
3 3  
4 4  
5 5  
6 6  
VARISTOR  
PMV  
FUSE  
T25A  
F01  
2
PULSE  
250V~  
MODULATING  
CN703  
VALVE  
P13  
P12  
P02  
P03 P01  
P14  
CN300  
P11  
5 4 3 2 1  
5 4 3 2 1  
3 2 1  
3 2 1  
CN301  
TERMINAL OF COMPRESSOR  
BLACK (C)  
2 1  
2 1  
PUR  
WHITE (S)  
1
2
3 L  
1
N
FM  
REACTOR  
RED (R)  
TO  
INDOOR  
UNIT  
POWER  
FAN MOTOR  
The sign in ( ) is displayed  
in the terminalcover  
SUPPLY  
220 to 240  
50Hz  
Color Identification  
BLK : BLACK  
BLU : BLUE  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
GRN : GREEN  
WHI : WHITE  
SIMPLE CHECK POINTS FOR DIAGNOSING FAULTS  
BRW : BROWN  
ORN : ORANGE  
YEL : YELLOW  
PUR : PURPLE  
Check  
items  
Diagnosis result  
TERMINAL BLOCK  
There is no supply voltage  
(AC220 to 240V) between L - N , 1 - 2  
There is no voltage (DC15 to 25V) 2 - 3  
Power supply and connecting  
cable check  
1
NOTE  
FUSE  
CM  
: Compressor  
T25A 250V to fuse (F01) blown  
Converter module (DB01) and  
electrolytic capacitor (C12 to C14) check  
IGBT module (Q200) check  
Fan motor check  
PMV : Pulse modulating valve  
2
3
4
T3.15A 250V to fuse (F04) blown  
FM  
TE  
TD  
TO  
TS  
: Fan motor  
: Heat exchanger Temp. Sensor  
: Discharge Temp. Sensor  
: Outdoor Temp. Sensor  
: Suction Temp. Sensor  
ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR VOLTAGE (C12, C13, C14)  
DC320V not available between  
+ – terminal of electrolytic capacitor  
T25A fuse (F01) check  
P.C. board and converter  
module (DB01) check  
IGBT : Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor  
DB01 : Converter module  
: Curreut Transformer  
Q300 : Fan motor driver module  
INVERTER OUTPUT (Inverter and compressor connector out of position)  
(Please confirm within six minutes after instructing in the drive.)  
Voltage between each line of inverter side  
conector pins are not equal.  
CT  
IGBT module and  
P.C. board check  
– 26 –  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
+
T03  
CT  
BU  
EU  
BV  
EV  
BW  
EW  
BX  
BY  
BZ  
CN09  
CN10  
CN11  
RED  
WHI  
BLK  
Compressor  
CM  
IGBT  
T04  
CT  
THERMOSTAT  
FOR  
module  
COMPRESSOR  
2 2  
1 1  
CN604  
CN605  
4
TE  
ORN  
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT  
(FOR P.C. BOARD)  
2 2  
CN500  
1 1  
ORN  
4-WAY VALVE COIL  
2 2  
1 1  
TS  
TD  
GRN  
Q200  
F04  
2
FUSE  
3.15A  
3 3  
2
1 1  
3 3  
1 1  
3
1
CN600  
CN601  
CN700  
P20  
YEL  
BLU  
C13  
P19  
P18  
P17  
3
C12  
2 2  
1 1  
FAN MOTOR  
TO  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
C11  
F02  
C10  
Fan  
circuit  
2
CN300  
CN301  
FM  
FUSE  
15A  
G
BLU  
YEL  
E
A
~
3 3  
1 1  
3 3  
CN302  
Converter  
module  
CN04  
2
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
1 1  
POWER  
RELAY  
F300  
~
+
FUSE  
T5A  
BLK  
WHI  
BLU  
RED  
PNK  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
DB01  
ORN  
RY01  
R05  
6 6  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
P10  
CN800  
CN06  
P.C. BOARD  
(MCC-1359)  
P11  
P13  
REACTOR  
PMV  
CN702  
2 2  
1 1  
REACTOR  
2 2  
1 1  
R06  
2 2  
1 1  
2 2  
1 1  
CN04  
ORN  
BLK  
WHI  
RED  
P12  
P09  
CN05  
T02  
CT  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
5 5  
4 4  
3 3  
2 2  
1 1  
P08  
P15  
PHOTO COUPLER  
BRN  
CN01  
P14  
CN13  
SUB  
P.C. BOARD  
(MCC-1398)  
F01  
2
F01  
FUSE  
T3.15A  
VARISTOR  
SURGE  
ABSORBER  
FUSE  
2
25A  
CN02  
CN01  
CN02  
WHI  
CN03  
REACTOR  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
RED  
BLK  
GRY  
WHI  
RED  
TERMINAL OF COMPRESSOR  
BLACK(C)  
1 2 3 L N  
1
TO  
POWER  
WHITE(S)  
The sign in ( )  
is displayed  
in the terminal  
cover  
INDOOR SUPPLY  
UNIT 220-240V  
~50Hz  
RED(R)  
SIMPLE CHECK POINTS FOR DIAGNOSING FAULTS  
Check  
items  
Diagnosis result  
TERMINAL BLOCK  
There is no supply voltage  
Connecting cable check  
1
(AC220 to 240V) between L - N , 1 - 2  
There is no voltage (DC15 to 25V) 2 - 3  
FUSE  
25A fuse (F01) blown, 15A fuse (F02) blown  
3.15A fuse (F04) blown,  
T5A fuse (F300) blown (SUB P.C. board)  
T3.15A fuse (F01) blown (SUB P.C. board)  
Converter module (DB01) and electrolytic  
capacitor (C10 to C13) check IGBT  
module (Q200) check, Fan motor check  
SUB P.C. board check  
2
3
4
Color Identification  
ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR VOLTAGE (C10, C11, C12, C13)  
DC320V not available between  
terminal of electrolytic capacitor  
BLK : BLACK  
WHI : WHITE  
BRN : BROWN  
ORN : ORANGE  
YEL : YELLOW  
PUR : PURPLE  
25A fuse (F01) check  
+
P.C. board and coverter  
module (DB01) check  
BLU : BLUE  
RED : RED  
GRY : GRAY  
PNK : PINK  
GRN : GREEN  
INVERTER OUTPUT (CN09, CN10, CN11)  
(Please confirm within six minutes after instructing in the drive.)  
Voltage between each line of inverterside  
conector pins are not equal.  
IGBT module and  
P.C. board check  
– 27 –  
6. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS  
6-1. Indoor Unit  
4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Fan motor (for indoor)  
Type  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 60 W, 220–240 V  
10 kat 25°C  
SWF-230-60-1  
155 mm  
2
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Float switch  
3
Ø6 mm, 1200 mm  
Ø6 mm, 1200 mm  
FS-0218-106  
ADP-1406  
10 kat 25°C  
4
10 kat 25°C  
5
6
Drain pump motor  
Concealed Duct Type  
RAV-SM560BT-E/RAV-SM800BT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 80 W, 220–240 V, 4P  
Output (Rated) 80 W, 220–240 V, 4P  
400WV, 5µF  
Fan motor (RAV-SM800BT-E)  
Fan motor (RAV-SM560BT-E)  
Capacitor (RAV-SM800BT-E)  
Capacitor (RAV-SM560BT-E)  
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
STF-230-80-4C  
STF-220-80-4C  
EAG40M805UF1  
CMPS400-4.0  
818 mm  
2
3
4
400WV, 4.0µF  
5
10 kat 25°C  
6
Ø6 mm, 1200 mm  
Ø6 mm, 1200 mm  
10 kat 25°C  
7
10 kat 25°C  
High-Wall Type  
RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM800KRT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Fan motor (for indoor)  
Type  
Specifications  
ICF340-30-1  
MP35EA12  
Output (Rated) 30 W, 220–240 V  
2
Grille motor  
3
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
268 mm  
10 kat 25°C  
4
Ø6 mm, 400 mm  
Ø6 mm, 400 mm  
10 kat 25°C  
5
RAV-SM560XT-E/RAV-SM800XT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Fan motor (for indoor)  
Type  
AFP-220-50-4A  
MP35EA  
mm  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 50 W, 220–240 V  
DC 12 V  
2
Grille motor  
3
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)  
10 kat 25°C  
4
Ø6 mm,  
Ø6 mm,  
mm  
mm  
10 kat 25°C  
5
– 28 –  
6-2. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 40 W  
Fan motor  
ICF-140-43-1  
2
Compressor  
DA130A1F-23F  
3 phase, 4P, 1100 W  
1=10 mH, 16A  
10 kat 25°C  
3
Reactor  
CH-57  
4
Outdoor temp. sensor (To-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Te-sensor)  
Suction temp. sensor (Ts-sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (Td-sensor)  
Fuse (Switching power (Protect))  
Fuse (Inverter, input (Current protect)  
4-way valve solenoid coil  
Compressor thermo. (Protection)  
5
10 kat 25°C  
6
10 kat 25°C  
7
50 kat 25°C  
8
T3.15 A, AC 250 V  
25 A, AC 250 V  
9
10  
11  
STF-0108G  
US-622  
ON : 90 5°C, OFF : 125 4°C  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
No.  
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Output (Rated) 63 W, 220–240 V  
3 phase, 4P, 1600 W  
1
2
Fan motor  
Compressor  
Reactor  
ICF-140-63-1  
DA220A2F-20L  
3
CH-47  
mH,  
A
4
Outdoor temp. sensor (To-sensor)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Te-sensor)  
Suction temp. sensor (Ts-sensor)  
Discharge temp. sensor (Td-sensor)  
Fuse (Switching power (Protect))  
Fuse (Inverter, input (Current protect))  
4-way valve solenoid coil  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
10 kat 25°C  
50 kat 25°C  
T3.15 A, AC 250 V  
25 A, AC 250 V  
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
DKV-M0ZS743B0  
Compressor thermo. (Protection)  
ON : 90 5°C, OFF : 125 4°C  
6-3. Accessory Separate Sold Parts  
RBC-U21PG (W) E (Ceiling panel)  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Motor-louver  
MP24GA  
DC 12 V  
2
TCB-DP11E (Drain up pump)  
No.  
1
Parts name  
Type  
Specifications  
Pump-drain  
PJD-05230TF-1  
AC 220–240 V  
2
– 29 –  
7. REFRIGERANT R410A  
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC  
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.  
(6) When an air conditioning system charged with a  
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small  
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,  
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration  
does not exceed the marginal level.  
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A  
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant  
(R22).The refrigerating oil is also changed in  
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful  
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or refrigerat-  
ing oil are not entered in the refrigerant cycle of the  
air conditioner using the new refrigerant during  
installation work or servicing time.  
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its  
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an  
oxygen starvation accident may result.  
(7) Be sure to carry out installation or removal  
according to the installation manual.  
The next section describes the precautions for air  
conditioner using the new refrigerant. Conforming to  
contents of the next section together with the  
general cautions included in this manual, perform  
the correct and safe work.  
Improper installation may cause refrigeration  
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.  
(8) Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner  
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs  
please call a qualified air conditioner technician  
or electrician.  
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing  
Improper repair’s may result in water leakage,  
electric shock and fire, etc.  
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than  
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may  
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and materi-  
als exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to carry out  
installation/servicing safely while taking the following  
precautions into consideration.  
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation  
7-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used  
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes  
and joints are mainly used. Copper pipes and joints  
suitable for the refrigerant must be chosen and  
installed. Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean  
copper pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are  
less affected by contaminants.  
(1) Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air  
conditioner which is designed to operate with  
R410A.  
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed, pres-  
sure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnor-  
mally high, and it may cause personal injury, etc.  
by a rupture.  
(1) Copper Pipes  
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes  
which are made of either copper or copper alloy  
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil  
is less than 40 mg/10 m. Do not use copper  
pipes having a collapsed, deformed or discol-  
ored portion (especially on the interior surface).  
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube  
may become blocked with contaminants.  
(2) Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use  
tools and materials exclusive for the refrigerant  
R410A.  
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the  
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air condi-  
tioner using R410A as refrigerant.To prevent  
mischarging, the diameter of the service port  
differs from that of R22.  
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs  
pressure higher than when using R22, it is  
necessary to choose adequate materials.  
(3) If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during  
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.  
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A  
are as shown in Table 7-2-1. Never use copper  
pipes thinner than 0.8 mm even when it is  
available on the market.  
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,  
a poisonous gas may occur.  
(4) When installing or removing an air conditioner,  
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the  
refrigeration cycle. Otherwise, pressure in the  
refrigeration cycle may become abnormally high  
so that a rupture or personal injury may be  
caused.  
(5) After completion of installation work, check to  
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas  
leakage.  
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming  
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,  
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.  
– 30 –  
Table 7-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes  
Thickness (mm)  
Nominal diameter  
Outer diameter (mm)  
R410A  
0.80  
R22  
0.80  
0.80  
0.80  
1.00  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
0.80  
12.70  
15.88  
0.80  
1.00  
(2) Joints  
b) Socket Joints  
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are  
used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all con-  
taminants.  
Socket joints are such that they are brazed  
for connections, and used mainly for thick  
pipings whose diameter is larger than 20 mm.  
Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in  
Table 7-2-2.  
a) Flare Joints  
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes  
cannot be used for pipings whose outer  
diameter exceeds 20 mm. In such a case,  
socket joints can be used.  
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and  
flare nuts are as shown in Tables 7-2-3 to 7-  
2-6 below.  
Table 7-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints  
Reference outer diameter of  
copper pipe jointed (mm)  
Minimum joint thickness  
(mm)  
Nominal diameter  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
0.50  
0.60  
0.70  
0.80  
12.70  
15.88  
(1) Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions  
a) Cutting the Pipe  
7-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials  
When performing the refrigerant piping installation,  
care should be taken to ensure that water or dust  
does not enter the pipe interior, that no other oil  
other than lubricating oils used in the installed air  
conditioner is used, and that refrigerant does not  
leak. When using lubricating oils in the piping  
processing, use such lubricating oils whose water  
content has been removed. When stored, be sure to  
seal the container with an airtight cap or any other  
cover.  
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe  
so that it is not deformed.  
b) Removing Burrs and Chips  
If the flared section has chips or burrs,  
refrigerant leakage may occur. Carefully  
remove all burrs and clean the cut surface  
before installation.  
– 31 –  
c) Insertion of Flare Nut  
d) Flare Processing  
Flare processing dimensions differ according  
to the type of flare tool. When using a con-  
ventional flare tool, be sure to secure “dimen-  
sion A” by using a gauge for size adjustment.  
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper  
pipe have been cleaned.  
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare  
processing correctly.  
ØD  
A
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conven-  
tional flare tool.  
Fig. 7-2-1 Flare processing dimensions  
Table 7-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A  
A (mm)  
Conventional flare tool  
Outer  
diameter  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare tool for  
R410A clutch type  
Clutch type  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
Wing nut type  
1.5 to 2.0  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
1.5 to 2.0  
12.70  
15.88  
2.0 to 2.5  
2.0 to 2.5  
Table 7-2-4 Dimensions related to flare processing for R22  
A (mm)  
Outer  
diameter  
(mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Conventional flare tool  
Flare tool for  
R22 clutch type  
Clutch type  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
0.5 to 1.0  
Wing nut type  
1.0 to 1.5  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
0 to 0.5  
1.0 to 1.5  
12.70  
15.88  
1.5 to 2.0  
1.5 to 2.0  
Table 7-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
(mm)  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut  
width (mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
9.1  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
23  
25  
17  
22  
26  
29  
13.2  
16.6  
19.7  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
9.7  
12.70  
15,88  
12.9  
16.0  
– 32 –  
Table 7-2-6 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22  
Dimension (mm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
Thickness  
(mm)  
Flare nut width  
(mm)  
(mm)  
A
B
C
D
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
3/4  
6.35  
9.52  
0.8  
0.8  
0.8  
1.0  
1.0  
9.0  
9.2  
6.5  
13  
20  
20  
23  
34  
17  
22  
24  
27  
36  
13.0  
16.2  
19.4  
23.3  
13.5  
16.0  
19.0  
24.0  
9.7  
12.70  
15.88  
19.05  
12.9  
16.0  
19.2  
D
B
A
C
Fig. 7-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface  
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and  
may be made non-removable. When choosing  
the tightening torque, comply with values  
designated by manufacturers.Table 7-2-7  
shows reference values.  
(2) Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions  
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions  
do not have any scar or dust, etc.  
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface  
with the union axis.  
NOTE:  
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by  
means of a torque wrench.The tightening  
torque for R410A is the same as that for  
conventional R22. Incidentally, when the  
torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.  
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use  
oil designated by the manufacturer. If any other oil is  
used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause  
the compressor to burn out.  
Table 7-2-7 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]  
Tightening torque of torque  
wrenches available on the market  
Nm (kgfcm)  
Nominal  
diameter  
Outer diameter  
(mm)  
Tightening torque  
Nm (kgfcm)  
1/4  
3/8  
1/2  
5/8  
6.35  
9.52  
14 to 18 (140 to 180)  
33 to 42 (330 to 420)  
50 to 62 (500 to 620)  
63 to 77 (630 to 770)  
16 (160), 18 (180)  
42 (420)  
12.70  
15.88  
55 (550)  
65 (650)  
– 33 –  
7-3. Tools  
7-3-1. Required Tools  
The service port diameter of packed valve of the outdoor unit in the air conditioner using R410A is changed to  
prevent mixing of other refrigerant.To reinforce the pressure-resisting strength, flare processing dimensions and  
opposite side dimension of flare nut (For Ø12.7 copper pipe) of the refrigerant piping are lengthened.  
The used refrigerating oil is changed, and mixing of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge,  
clogging of capillary, etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.  
(1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))  
(2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
(3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)  
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.  
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)  
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability  
R410A  
Conventional air  
conditioner installation  
air conditioner installation  
No.  
Used tool  
Usage  
Existence of  
Whether conven- Whether new equipment  
new equipment tional equipment  
can be used with  
for R410A  
can be used  
conventional refrigerant  
Flare tool  
Pipe flaring  
Ye s  
(Note 1)  

¡
*
Copper pipe gauge for  
adjusting projection  
margin  
Flaring by conventional  
flare tool  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Ye s  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
*
*
Torque wrench  
Connection of flare nut  
ƒ
X
X
Gauge manifold  
Charge hose  
Evacuating, refrigerant  
charge, run check, etc.  
X
X
X
X
¡
¡
Vacuum pump adapter Vacuum evacuating  
Ye s  
Ye s  
Electronic balance for  
Refrigerant charge  
refrigerant charging  
Refrigerant cylinder  
Leakage detector  
Charging cylinder  
Refrigerant charge  
Gas leakage check  
Refrigerant charge  
Ye s  
Ye s  
ˆ
Š
X
X
X
X
¡
X
(Note 2)  
(Note 1) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection  
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.  
(Note 2) Charging cylinder for R410A is being currently developed.  
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)  
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary  
as the general tools.  
(4) Reamer  
(9) Hole core drill (Ø65)  
(1) Vacuum pump  
Use vacuum pump by  
attaching vacuum pump adapter.  
(5) Pipe bender  
(10) Hexagon wrench  
(Opposite side 4mm)  
(6) Level vial  
(2) Torque wrench  
(3) Pipe cutter  
(11) Tape measure  
(12) Metal saw  
(7) Screwdriver (+, –)  
(8) Spanner or Monkey wrench  
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.  
(1) Clamp meter  
(2) Thermometer  
(3) Insulation resistance tester  
(4) Electroscope  
– 34 –  
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant  
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the  
following steps.  
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant  
remains in the equipment.  
When the compound gauge’s pointer has indicated  
–0.1 Mpa (–76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the  
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pump’s  
power switch.  
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service  
port at the outdoor unit’s gas side.  
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure  
that the compound gauge’s pointer does not return.  
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump  
adapter.  
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,  
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the  
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge  
liquid refrigerant.  
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas  
sides.  
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the  
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pump’s  
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the  
cycle.  
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)  
Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.  

If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.  
Do not carry out additional charging.  
ƒ
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the  
refrigeration cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the  
specified amount is charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high  
pressure, and may cause a rupture or personal injury.  
(INDOOR unit)  
(Liquid side)  
(Gas side)  
(OUTDOOR unit)  
Opened  
Closed  
Refrigerant cylinder  
(With siphon pipe)  
Check valve  
Open/Close valve  
for charging  
Service port  
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging  
Fig. 7-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging  
– 35 –  
Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.  

When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.  
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.  
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the  
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.  
[ Cylinder with siphon ]  
[ Cylinder without siphon ]  
Gauge manifold  
Gauge manifold  
OUTDOOR unit  
OUTDOOR unit  
c y l i n d e r  
a n t i g e r R e f r  
Refrigerant  
cylinder  
Electronic  
balance  
Electronic  
balance  
Siphon  
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.  
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the composi-  
tion of the charged refrigerant changes and the  
characteristics of the equipment varies.  
Fig. 7-4-2  
7-5. Brazing of Pipes  
Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react  
with sulfur and produce a fragile compound  
water solution, which may cause a gas  
leakage. Therefore, use any other type of  
brazing filler at a hot spring resort, etc., and  
coat the surface with a paint.  

7-5-1. Materials for Brazing  
(1) Silver brazing filler  
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed  
of silver and copper. It is used to join iron,  
copper or copper alloy, and is relatively expen-  
sive though it excels in solderability.  
When performing brazing again at time of  
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.  
(2) Phosphor bronze brazing filler  
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used  
to join copper or copper alloy.  
7-5-2. Flux  
(1) Reason why flux is necessary  
(3) Low temperature brazing filler  
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign  
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow  
of brazing filler.  
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called  
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead. Since it is  
weak in adhesive strength, do not use it for  
refrigerant pipes.  
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal  
surface from being oxidized.  
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,  
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated  
metal.  
– 36 –  
(2) Characteristics required for flux  
7-5-3. Brazing  
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with  
the brazing temperature.  
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,  
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it  
must be performed by a person qualified.  
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux  
is hard to carbonize.  
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in  
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to  
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas  
(N2) flow.  
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.  
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and  
brazing filler is minimum.  
• It excels in coating performance and is harm-  
less to the human body.  
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.  
(1) Brazing method to prevent oxidation  
As the flux works in a complicated manner as  
described above, it is necessary to select an  
adequate type of flux according to the type and  
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and  
brazing method, etc.  
Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to  

the Nitrogen gas cylinder.  
Use a copper pipe to direct the piping mate-  
rial, and attach a flow-meter to the cylinder.  
ƒ
(3) Types of flux  
Apply a seal onto the clearance between the  
piping material and inserted copper pipe for  
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the  
Nitrogen gas.  
Noncorrosive flux  
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric  
acid.  
It is effective in case where the brazing tem-  
perature is higher than 800°C.  
When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to  
keep the piping end open.  
Activated flux  
Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it  
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa (0.2kgf/  
cm²) by means of the reducing valve.  
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing  
are this type.  
It features an increased oxide film removing  
capability due to the addition of compounds  
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride  
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid  
compound.  
After performing the steps above, keep the  
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools  
down to a certain extent (temperature at  
which pipes are touchable with hands).  
Remove the flux completely after brazing.  
(4) Piping materials for brazing and used braz-  
ing filler/flux  
Piping  
material  
Used brazing  
filler  
Used  
flux  
Copper - Copper Phosphor copper Do not use  
M
Flow meter  
Copper - Iron  
Iron - Iron  
Silver  
Silver  
Paste flux  
Vapor flux  
Stop valve  
Nitrogen gas  
cylinder  
From Nitrogen cylinder  
Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.  

When chlorine contained in the flux remains  
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.  
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain  
chlorine.  
Pipe  
Nitrogen  
gas  
Rubber plug  
When adding water to the flux, use water  
which does not contain chlorine (e.g. distilled  
water or ion-exchange water).  
ƒ
Remove the flux after brazing.  
Fig. 7-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing  
– 37 –  
8. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM  
8-1. Indoor Control Circuit  
Main (Sub) master remote controller  
Weekly timer  
LCD  
driver  
Display  
LCD  
Display  
LCD  
Max. 8 units are connectable.*1  
CPU  
Display  
LED  
Function setup  
Key switch  
Function setup  
Key switch  
*1 Max. 7 units when network adapters  
are attached  
CPU  
*2 Network adapters are attached to only  
one unit.  
CN2 CN1  
DC5V  
3
*
*3 Weekly timer is not connectable to the  
sub remote controller.  
DC5V  
Remote  
Power  
circuit  
Secondary  
battery  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
Power circuit  
Central control  
remote controller  
(Option)  
Option  
A
Option  
#3  
Indoor unit  
#1  
#2  
B
A
B
A
B
Network adapter (Option)  
Network adapter  
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402)  
P.C. board  
EEPROM  
Remote  
Remote  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
(MCC-1401)  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
DC20V  
DC12V  
DC5V  
X
AI NET  
communication  
circuit  
CPU  
Y
H8/3687  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Humidifier  
DC5V  
relay output  
CPU  
H8/3039  
Power circuit Switch setup  
Same as Same as  
the left  
the left  
Driver  
Heater relay  
output  
2
2
*
*
Transformer  
Float input  
Louver  
motor  
CPU  
Outside  
output  
TMP88CH  
Drain  
pump  
47FG  
AC  
Serial  
send/  
receive  
circuit  
Run  
Warning  
Ready  
Thermo. ON  
Cool  
(TMP88PH  
47FG)  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
Fan motor  
control  
circuit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Indoor  
fan  
motor  
Power  
circuit  
Heat  
Fan  
DC280V  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Wireless remote controller kit  
Sensor P.C. board (MCC-1418)  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Remote  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
Temporary  
operation SW  
Power  
circuit  
DC5V  
Buzzer  
Receive circuit  
Outdoor unit  
CPU  
Function  
setup SW  
Optional only for 4-way air  
discharge cassette type models  
Display LED  
– 38 –  
8-2. Control Specifications  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
1) Distinction of outdoor units  
Remarks  
1
When power  
supply is reset  
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are  
distinguished, and control is exchanged according to  
the distinguished result.  
2) Setting of speed of the indoor fan/setting whether to  
adjust air direction or not.  
(Only 4-way models)  
Based on EEPROM data, speed of the indoor fan or  
setting whether to adjust air direction or not is se-  
lected.  
Air speed/  
Air direction adjustment  
2
Operation mode 1) Based on the operation mode selecting command  
selection  
from the remote controller, the operation mode is  
selected.  
Remote controller  
Outline of control  
command  
STOP  
FAN  
Air conditioner stops.  
Fan operation  
COOL  
DRY  
Cooling operation  
Dry operation  
HEAT  
AUTO  
Heating operation  
• COOL/HEAT operation mode  
is automatically selected by Ta  
and Ts for operation.  
Ta : Room temperature  
Ts : Setup temperature  
Tsc : Setup temperature in  
cooling operation  
Tsh : Setup temperature  
+ Room temperature  
control temperature  
compensation  
Ta  
( C)  
COOL  
+1.5  
(COOL ON)  
Tsc  
or Tsh  
(COOL OFF)  
HEAT  
-1.5  
1) Judge the selection of COOL/HEAT mode as shown  
in the figure above.  
When 10 minutes passed after thermostat had  
been turned off, the heating operation (Thermo  
OFF) is exchanged to cooling operation if Tsh  
exceeds +1.5 or more.  
(COOL OFF) and (COOL ON) in the figure indicate  
an example.  
When 10 minutes passed after thermostat had  
been turned off, the cooling operation (Thermo  
OFF) is exchanged to heating operation if Tsc  
exceeds –1.5 or less.  
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of  
COOL/HEAT, refer to item 4.  
3) For the temperature correction of room temperature  
control in automatic heating operation, refer to item 3.  
– 39 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
3
Room  
temperature  
control  
1) Adjustment range Remote controller setup tem-  
perature (°C)  
COOL/  
DRY  
Heating  
Auto  
operation operation  
Wired type  
18 to 29  
18 to 30  
18 to 29  
16 to 30  
18 to 29  
17 to 27  
Wireless type  
*
: Only for 4-way air discharge cassette type  
*
2) Using the item code 06, the setup temperature in  
heating operation can be compensated.  
Shift of suction tempera-  
ture in heating operation  
Setup data  
0
2
4
6
Setup temp.  
compensation  
+0°C  
+2°C  
+4°C  
+6°C  
Setting at shipment  
Setup data  
2
4
5
Automatic  
capacity control  
(GA control)  
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the  
operation frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.  
Air speed  
selection  
1) Operation with (HH), (H), (L), or [AUTO] mode is  
performed by the command from the remote controller.  
HH > H > L > LL  
2) When the air speed mode [AUTO] is selected, the air  
speed varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.  
<COOL>  
Ta ( C)  
A
+3.0  
B
C
D
HH  
+2.5  
+2.0  
+1.5  
+1.0  
(HH)  
H (HH)  
H (HH)  
L(H)  
E
+0.5  
Tsc  
-0.5  
L(H)  
L(H)  
L(L)  
F
G
• Controlling operation in case when thermo of remote  
controller works is same as a case when thermo of  
the body works.  
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not  
changed for 3 minutes. However when the air volume  
is exchanged, the air speed changes.  
• When cooling operation has started, the air speed  
selects a downward slope, that is, the high position.  
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary,  
the air speed does not change.  
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
cooling operation.  
– 40 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Ta ( C)  
(-0.5) 1.0  
Remarks  
5
Air speed  
selection  
(Continued)  
<HEAT>  
L(L)  
L(H)  
H(H)  
E
D
(0)  
Tsh  
(+0.5) +1.0  
H
(HH)  
(+1.0) +2.0  
(+1.5) +3.0  
C
B
A
HH  
(HH)  
(+2.0) +4.0  
Value in the parentheses indicates one when thermostat of  
the remote controller works.  
Value without parentheses indicates one when thermostat  
of the body works.  
If the air speed has been changed once, it is not  
changed for 1 minute. However when the air speed is  
exchanged, the air speed changes.  
When heating operation has started, the air speed  
selects a upward slope, that is, the high position.  
If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the  
air speed does not change.  
Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic  
heating operation.  
In Tc 60°C, the air speed increases by 1 step.  
<Operation of duct only>  
Standard  
High ceiling  
SM560  
SM800  
Tap  
Revolutions per  
minute (rpm)  
COOL HEAT COOL HEAT  
UL  
L
UL  
FD  
FD  
FB  
FA  
F9  
F8  
F7  
F6  
F5  
F4  
F3  
F2  
F1  
320  
320  
330  
350  
360  
370  
400  
410  
420  
440  
480  
530  
580  
320  
330  
340  
360  
370  
380  
410  
440  
450  
480  
500  
540  
580  
Tc: Indoor heat exchanger  
sensor temperature  
L+  
L
L+  
M
M
UL  
L
UL  
L
M+  
H
M+  
L+  
L+  
H
M+,M M+,M  
H
H
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if  
thermostat is turned off.  
[PRE-HEAT] display  
4) If Ta 25°C when heating operation has started and  
when defrost operation has been cleared, it operates  
with HIGH (H) mode or (HH) for 1 minute from when Tc  
has entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive  
control (Item 6).  
F5  
F4  
Tc  
( C)  
47  
5) In automatic cooling/heating operation, the revolution  
frequency of [HH] is set larger than that in the standard  
cooling/heating operation. However the revolution  
frequency is restricted in the automatic heating opera-  
tion as shown in the following figure.  
42  
F5  
41 –  
No.  
Item  
Cool air  
discharge  
preventive  
control  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
6
1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled based In D or E zone, the priority  
on the detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor. is given to setup of air  
As shown below, the  
upper limit of the  
revolution frequency  
is determined.  
volume exchange.  
In A and B zones,  
[PRE-HEAT] is displayed.  
Tc  
( C)  
32  
Tcj  
HH  
H
30  
L
E zone  
D zone  
28  
UL  
26  
OFF  
C zone  
B zone  
A zone  
20  
16  
7
Freeze preven- 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is  
Tcj : Indoor heat ex-  
changer sensor  
temperature  
tive control  
performed as follows based on the detected tempera-  
ture of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
(Low tempera-  
ture release)  
When [J] zone is detected for 6 minutes (Following  
figure), the commanded frequency is decreased from  
the real operation frequency. After then the commanded  
frequency changes every 30 seconds while operation is  
performed in [J] zone.  
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the opera-  
tion is held.  
When [I] zone is detected, the timer is cleared and the  
operation returns to the normal operation.  
If the commanded frequency becomes S0 because the  
operation continues in [J] zone, the return temperature  
A is raised from 5°C to 12°C until [I] zone is detected  
and the indoor fan  
operates with [M] mode.  
( C)  
A
5
2
I
K
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control  
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the condition  
is satisfied. (However the temperature for J zone  
dashing control is changed from 2°C to 5°C.)  
8
High-temp  
release control  
1) The heating operation is performed as follows based on  
the detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
When [M] zone is detected, the commanded fre-  
quency is decreased from the real operation fre-  
quency. After then the commanded frequency  
changes every 30 seconds while operation is per-  
formed in [M] zone.  
In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.  
When [L] zone is detected, the commanded fre-  
quency is returned to the original value by approx.  
6Hz every 60 seconds.  
Tc( C)  
M
Setup at  
shipment  
Tcj  
A
Control temp (°C)  
N
A
B
B
56 (54) 52 (52)  
L
NOTE :  
When the operation has started or when Tc or Tcj became  
lower than 30°C after start of the operation, temperature is  
controlled between values in parentheses of A and B.  
Same when thermostat is  
turned off.  
42 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
9
Drain pump control 1) In cooling operation (including Dry operation), the  
drain pump is usually operated.  
(For the duct, when  
2) If the float switch operates while drain pump  
the drain-up kit  
(sold separately) is  
mounted)  
operates, the compressor stops, the drain pump  
continues the operation, and a check code is  
output.  
3) If the float switch operates while drain pump stops,  
the compressor stops and the drain pump oper-  
ates. If the float switch keeps operating for approx.  
4 minutes, a check code is output.  
Check code [P10]  
10 After-heat elimina- When heating operation stops, the indoor fan operates  
tion  
with LOW mode for approx. 30 seconds.  
11 Flap control  
(For 4-way air  
1) Flap position setup  
• When the flap position is changed, the position  
moves necessarily to downward discharge  
position once to return to the set position.  
• The flap position can be set up in the following  
operation range.  
discharge cassette  
type only)  
In cooling/dry operation In heating/fan operation  
• In group twin/triple operation, the flap positions  
can be set up collectively or individually.  
2) Swing setup  
• The swinging position can be moved in the  
following operation range.  
All modes  
• In group twin/triple operation, the swinging  
positions can be set up collectively or individu-  
ally.  
Warning :  
3) When the unit stops or when a warning is output,  
the flap automatically moves downward.  
4) While the heating operation is ready, the flap  
automatically moves upward.  
A check code is displayed  
on the remote controller,  
and the indoor unit stops.  
(Excluding [F08] and  
[L31])  
– 43 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
12 Frequency fixed  
operation  
<In case of wired remote controller>  
1. When pushing [CHECK] button for 4 seconds or more,  
[TEST] is displayed on the display screen and the  
mode enters in Test run mode.  
(Test run)  
2. Push [ON/OFF] button.  
3. Using [MODE] button, change the mode from [COOL]  
to [HEAT].  
Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.  
During test run operation, the temperature cannot be  
adjusted.  
An error is detected as usual.  
A frequency fixed operation is performed.  
4. After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the  
operation. (Display in the display part is same as the  
procedure in item 1).)  
5. Push [CHECK] button to clear the test run mode.  
([TEST] display in the display part disappears and the  
status returns to the normal stop status.)  
<In case of wireless remote controller>  
(Option for 4-way air discharge cassette type only)  
1. Turn off the power of the set.  
Remove the adjuster with sensors from the ceiling  
panel.  
2. Turn Bit [1: TEST] of sensor P.C. board switch [S003]  
from OFF to ON.  
Attach the sensor P.C. board cover and mount the  
adjuster with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
Turn on the power of the set.  
3. Push [ON/OFF] button of the wireless remote controller  
and set the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] using  
[MODE] button.  
(During test run operation, all the display lamps of  
wireless remote controller sensors flash.)  
Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.  
An error is detected as usual.  
A frequency fixed operation is performed.  
4. After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the  
operation.  
5. Turn off the power of the set.  
Turn Bit [1: TEST] of sensor P.C. board switch [S003]  
from ON to OFF.  
Mount the adjuster with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
13 Filter sign display 1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the  
[FILTER] goes on.  
(Except wireless  
type)  
filter reset signal is sent to the remote controller when  
the specified time (2500H) has passed, and it is  
displayed on LCD.  
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the  
remote controller, time of the calculation timer is  
cleared. In this case, the measurement time is reset if  
the specified time has passed, and display on LCD  
disappears.  
44 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
14 Central control  
mode selection  
1) Setting at the central controller side enables to select  
the contents which can be operated on the remote  
controller at indoor unit side.  
2) RBC-AMT21  
[Last push priority] :  
(No display)  
The operation contents can be selected from both  
remote controller and central controller of the indoor  
unit side, and the operation is performed with the  
contents selected at the last.  
[Center] :  
[CENTER] goes on.  
[CENTER] goes on.  
Start/Stop operation only can be handled on the  
remote controller at indoor unit side.  
[Operation Prohibited] :  
It cannot be operated on the remote controller at  
indoor unit side. (Stop status is held.)  
In a case of wireless type, the  
display lamp does not change.  
However, contents which can be  
operated are same.  
The status set in [CENTER]/  
[Operation Prohibited] mode is  
notified with the receiving sound  
Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi(5 times).  
15 Energy-save  
control  
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to  
be operated.  
(By connected  
outdoor unit)  
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the  
range not to lose the comfort ability according to input  
values of various sensors.  
3) Data (Input value room temp. Ta, Outside temp. To, Air  
volume, Indoor heat exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for  
20 minutes are taken the average to calculate  
correction value of the setup temperature.  
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes,  
and the shifted range is as follows.  
In cooling time : +1.5 to 1.0K  
In heating time : 1.5 to +1.0K  
16 Max. frequency 1) This control is operated by selecting [AUTO] opera-  
cut control  
tion mode.  
2) COOL operation mode: the frequency is controlled  
according to  
the following  
figure if  
Ta( C)  
Normal control  
+4  
+3  
Max. frequency is restricted  
to approximately the rated  
cooling frequency  
To < 28°C.  
Tsc  
3) HEAT operation mode: the frequency is controlled  
according to  
Ta( C)  
the right  
Tsh  
Max. frequency is restricted  
to approximately the rated  
figure if  
To > 15°C.  
heating frequency  
3  
4  
Normal control  
17 DC motor  
(For 4-way air  
discharge  
1) When the fan operation has started, positioning of the  
stator and the rotor are performed.  
(Moves slightly with tap sound)  
cassette type  
only)  
2) The motor operates according to the command from  
the indoor controller.  
NOTES :  
When the fan rotates while the air conditioner stops  
due to entering of outside air, etc, the air conditioner  
may operated while the fan motor stops.  
When a fan locking is found, the air conditioner stops,  
and an error is displayed.  
Check code [P12]  
45 –  
Microcomputer operation LED  
Network adapter  
power supply  
Indoor/Outdoor  
inter-unit cable  
DC fan output  
EEPROM  
Drain pump output  
DC fan return  
Float SW  
Louver  
TC sensor  
Outside error input  
TCJ sensor  
Remote controller power LED  
TA sensor  
CHK  
DISP  
Optional output  
EXCT  
Remote controller inter-unit cable  
Power transformer input (AC11V,14V,20V)  
Microcomputer operation LED  
Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit cable  
Power transformer output  
Louver  
Remote controller  
power LED  
Drain pump  
output  
HA  
Optional output  
Fan output  
Float SW  
TA sensor  
Network adapter  
power supply  
EXCT  
Remote controller  
inter-unit cable  
TCsensor  
TCJ sensor  
Outside error input  
CHK  
DISP  
9. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS  
9-1. Microcomputer System Block Diagram  
9-1-1. Connection of Main Remote Controller  
Main (Sub) master remote controller  
EEPROM  
Display  
LCD  
The P.C. boards of the indoor unit are  
classified into 4 boards according to the  
function.  
1. Main P.C. board (MCC-1370A)  
Controller for power circuit, fan motor  
driver, and whole unit  
CPU  
Function setup  
Key switch  
TMP47C  
820F  
Display  
LED  
2. Sub P.C. board (MCC-1370B)  
Setup of unit No. and concurrent twin  
* The sub P.C. board is located near the  
remote controller terminal block.  
3. Sensor display P.C. board (MCC-819)  
Wireless remote controller receive part,  
LED display part  
4. Communication P.C. board (MCC-1337)  
Communication part with the central  
control remote controller (Option)  
AC  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
Power circuit  
A B C  
A B C  
Max. 16 units are connectable.  
Indoor unit  
#1  
#2  
#3  
B C  
B C  
Sensor display P.C. board  
(MCC-819)  
Main P.C. board (MCC-1370A)  
EEPROM  
Sensors LED  
Serial send/  
receive circuit  
TA shift setup  
Model selection  
Function setup  
CPU  
Remote controller  
No. setupTwin/  
Triple setup  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
TMP87CM  
40AN  
(TMP87PM  
40AN)  
Optional  
output  
Comp.  
Run  
Sub P.C. board  
(MCC-1370B)  
Same as  
the left  
Same as  
the left  
Driver  
Error  
Heat  
Louver  
motor  
Indoor fan  
control circuit  
DC  
12V  
DC  
5V  
Indoor  
fan  
motor  
DC15V  
AC  
Serial  
send/  
receive  
circuit  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
Power  
circuit  
Transformer  
DC310~340V  
Communication Pulse  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
LSI  
trans  
MCC-1337  
Communication P.C. board (Option)  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
X
Y
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor  
unit  
Outdoor unit  
48 –  
9-1-2. Connection of Wireless Remote Controller  
Indoor unit  
#1  
Main P.C. board (MCC-1370A)  
EEPROM  
Infrared radiation  
Sensors LED  
TA shift setup  
Model selection  
Function setup  
Sensor display  
P.C. board  
CPU  
TA sensor  
TC sensor  
TCJ sensor  
Remote controller  
No. setupTwin/  
Optional  
TMP87CM  
40AN  
(TMP87PM  
40AN)  
Triple setup  
output  
Comp.  
Driver  
Sub P.C. board(MCC-1370B)  
Run  
Error  
Heat  
Louver  
motor  
Indoor fan  
control circuit  
DC  
12V  
DC  
5V  
Indoor  
fan  
motor  
DC15V  
AC  
Serial  
send/  
receive  
circuit  
synchronous  
signal input  
circuit  
Power  
circuit  
Transformer  
DC310~340V  
Communication Pulse  
LSI  
trans  
MCC-1337  
Communication P.C. board (Option)  
X Y  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Outdoor unit  
49 –  
9-1-3. Control Specifications  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
1) Distinction of outdoor units  
Remarks  
1
When power  
supply is reset  
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are  
distinguished, and control is exchanged according to  
the distinguished result.  
2) Setting of the indoor fan speed  
Based on EEPROM data, rspeed of the indoor fan is Air speed  
selected.  
2
Operation mode  
selection  
1) Based on the operation mode selecting command  
from the remote controller, the operation mode is  
selected.  
Remote controller  
Outline of control  
command  
STOP  
FAN  
Air conditioner stops.  
Fan operation  
Cooling operation  
Dry operation  
Heating operation  
Ta  
COOL  
DRY  
HEAT  
AUTO  
Ta : Room temperature  
Ts : Setup temperature  
COOL  
( C)  
+3  
(COOL ON)  
Tsc : Setup temperature  
in cooling operation  
Tsh : Setup temperature  
in heating operation  
Tsc  
or Tsh  
(COOL OFF)  
3  
Heating  
1) Judge the selection of COOL/HEAT mode as shown in the  
figure below.  
When the heating operation (Thermo OFF) is exchanged  
to cooling operation if Tsh exceeds +3 or more.  
(COOL OFF) and (COOL ON) in the figure indicate an  
example.  
When the cooling operation (Thermo OFF) is exchanged  
to heating operation if Tsc exceeds -3 or less.  
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of  
COOL/HEAT, refer to item 4.  
3) For the temperature correction of room temperature control  
in automatic heating operation, refer to item 3.  
3
Room tempera-  
ture control  
1) Adjustment range Remote controller setup tempera-  
ture (°C)  
COOL/  
DRY  
Heating  
operation  
Auto  
operation  
Standard type  
Wireless type  
18 to 29  
17 to 30  
18 to 29  
17 to 30  
18 to 29  
19 to 29  
Max. setup temperature  
Ts (Max) = 35°C  
Remote controller  
setup temp  
5 4 3 2 1 Standard 1 2 3 4 5  
Setup temp (°C)  
19 20 21 22 23  
24  
25 26 27 28 29  
2) Differential 1K (=deg)  
3) In heating operation, the setup temperature can be  
corrected by using Dip switch (SW03) on the indoor  
P.C. board.  
Setup at shipment  
SW03  
1
2
ON  
ON OFF OFF  
SW03  
ON OFF ON OFF  
1
2
Setup temp correction  
+0°C +2°C +4°C +6°C  
ON  
OFF  
50 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
4
Automatic  
capacity control  
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the  
operation frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.  
(GA control)  
NOTE :  
In cooling operation :  
When calculating the following conditions for 29 minutes,  
the commanded frequency is assumed as the rated  
cooling frequency.  
1
2
3
4
Ta < 28°C  
Indoor fan [High]  
32°C < To 38°C or no To  
Operation exceeding the rated cooling frequency  
In heating operation: When calculating the following  
conditions for 29 minutes, the commanded frequency is  
assumed as the rated heating frequency.  
1
2
3
4
5
Ta 19°C  
Indoor fan [High]  
5°C < To 10°C or no To  
Operation exceeding the rated heating frequency  
Tc 38°C  
NOTE :  
Tc : Temperature of indoor  
heat exchanger  
sensor  
When air volume is set to [L], the maximum frequency is  
restricted.  
5
Air volume  
control  
1) Operation with [HIGH (H)], [MED (M)], [LOW (L)], or  
[AUTO] mode is performed by the command from the  
remote controller.  
2) When the air volume mode [AUTO] is selected, the air UH > H > M+ > M > L + >  
volume varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.  
L > UL  
Cooling of  
<COOL>  
Auto  
Normal  
cooling/  
cooling  
Ta  
( C)  
heating  
H
H
(HIGH)  
(HIGH)  
M+  
M+  
+1.5  
+1.0  
+0.5  
Tsc  
M+  
M
(MED)  
L+  
(LOW)  
M
(MED)  
L
L+  
0.5  
Heatiing of  
Auto  
<HEAT>  
cooling/  
heating  
Normal  
heating  
Ta  
( C)  
UL (Ultra Low)  
only in Comp OFF  
+0.5  
Tsc  
L
L+  
L+  
M
(MED)  
0.5  
1.0  
1.5  
M
M+  
M+  
(MED)  
M+  
(HIGH)  
H
H
UH  
51 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
5
Air volume control  
(Continued)  
Air volume setup  
SM560 SM800  
Tap  
Revolutions per  
minute (rpm)  
COOL, DRY, FAN HEAT  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
FA  
FB  
FC  
FD  
UH  
1290  
1230  
1180  
1150  
1120  
1060  
1060  
990  
1480  
1480  
1340  
1320  
1310  
1200  
1200  
1100  
1040  
900  
H
H
M+  
M+  
M
M
L+  
L
L+  
L
940  
UL  
900  
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [Ultra  
Low (UL)] or [STOP] if thermostat is turned off.  
4) If Ta 25°C when heating operation has started and  
when defrost operation has been cleared, it oper-  
ates with MED mode or higher mode for 1 minute  
from when Tc has entered in A zone of cool air  
discharge preventive control (Item 6).  
Stopis a cool air  
discharge preventive  
controloperation by Tc.  
Tc: Indoor heat exchanger  
sensor temp.  
5) In automatic cooling/heating operation, the revolu-  
tion frequency of [HIGH (H)] is set larger than that in  
the standard cooling/heating operation. However the  
revolution frequency is restricted in the automatic  
heating operation as shown in the following figure.  
F5  
F4  
Tc  
( C)  
47  
42  
F4  
Display: [AUTO]  
6) (For wireless type only) The mode enters [AUTO] in  
automatic cooling/heating operation.  
7) The mode enters [LOW (L)] during Dry operation  
6
Cool air discharge 1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled  
preventive control  
based on the detected temperature of Tc sensor.  
As shown below, the upper limit of the revolution  
frequency is determined.  
Display in C zone  
A zone : Setup air volume  
from remote  
Display of main unit:  
Defrost LED goes on.  
controller  
Tc( C)  
B zone : Low air  
C zone : OFF  
When wired remote  
A
30  
26  
20  
16  
controller is installed:  
PRE-HEAT/DEFROST  
goes on remote controller.  
C
B
52 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
7
Freeze preventive 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is  
Tcj : Indoor heat  
control  
(Low temperature  
release)  
performed as follows based on the detected tem-  
perature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.  
When [J] zone is detected for T1 minutes (Following  
figure), the commanded frequency is decreased  
from the real operation frequency. After then the  
commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds  
while operation is performed in [J] zone.  
exchanger sensor  
temperature  
T1  
Normal  
Twin  
6 minutes  
6 minutes  
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the  
operation is held.  
When [I] zone is detected, the timer is cleared and  
the operation returns to the normal operation.  
If the commanded frequency becomes S0 because  
the operation continues in [J] zone, the return  
temperature A is raised from 5°C to 12°C until [I]  
zone is detected and the indoor fan operates with [L]  
mode.  
( C)  
5
2
A
I
K
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control  
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the  
condition is satisfied.  
8
High-temp release 1) The heating operation is performed as follows based  
control  
on the detected temperature of Tc sensor.  
When [M] zone is detected, the commanded  
frequency is decreased from the real operation  
frequency. After then the commanded frequency  
changes every 30 seconds while operation is  
performed in [M] zone.  
In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.  
When [L] zone is detected, the commanded  
frequency is returned to the original value by  
approx. 6Hz every 60 seconds.  
Setup at shipment  
Tc ( C)  
A
M
N
Control temp (°C)  
A
B
B
56 (54) 52 (52)  
L
NOTE :  
When the operation has started or when Tc became  
lower than 30°C after start of the operation, tempera-  
ture is controlled between values in parentheses of A  
and B.  
Same when thermostat is  
turned off.  
53 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
The louver angle is displayed  
Remarks  
9
Louver control  
Full close  
setting 0° as Full close.  
1) Louver  
position  
1) In the initial operation after  
power-ON, the position is  
0
automatically controlled according to the operating  
status (COOL/HEAT).  
Cooling  
Heating  
45  
103  
2) After then a louver position is stored in the microcom-  
puter every time when position is operated on the  
remote controller, and the louver operates at the position  
stored in memory in the next operation and after.  
* If the operation mode has been changed from COOL  
to HEAT, from HEAT to COOL, or the power has  
turned off, the stored louver position is cleared and  
the status returns to one in item 1).  
2) Air direction  
adjustment  
(Swing  
1) When pushing [LOUVER] button during operation, the  
louver starts swinging.  
2) When the louver has arrived at the desired position, push  
[LOUVER] again.The louver stops at that position.  
operation)  
10 Frequency fixed 1) In case of wired remote controller  
operation  
[COOL]/[HEAT] flash.  
Air volume: [AUTO]  
Temperature  
1. When pushing [ON/OFF] button on the remote  
(Test run)  
controller continuously for 5 seconds, the mode  
enters [TEST]. The indoor fan rotates with [HIGH]  
and a frequency fixed operation starts.  
COOL: [L]  
HEAT: [H]  
2. During this operation, the buttons other than [ON/  
OFF], [UP ] and [DOWN ] cannot be accepted.  
However, items 7 and 8 are effective.  
3. To stop the frequency fixed operation, use [ON/OFF] Commanded frequency  
button only.  
Approximately [S7]  
2) In case of wireless remote controller (Without wired  
remote controller)  
1. When pushing [Temporary] button continuously for  
10 seconds or more, Pisound is heard and the  
mode enters [TEST]. The indoor fan rotates with  
[HIGH] and a frequency fixed operation of [COOL]  
starts.  
NOTES :  
Temporary button is provided to near the display part of  
the main unit when opening the front panel.  
If [Temporary] button is not continuously pushed for 10  
seconds, Automatic heating/cooling operationis  
performed.  
2. To stop the operation, push [Temporary] button again.  
NOTE :  
Operation on the wireless remote controller is not ac-  
cepted.  
54 –  
No.  
Item  
Outline of specifications  
Remarks  
11 Filter sign display 1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the filter  
lamp (Orange) on the display part of the main unit goes on  
when the specified time (240H) has passed. When a wired  
remote controller is connected, the filter reset signal is sent to  
the remote controller, and also it is displayed on LCD of the  
wired remote controller.  
[FILTER] goes  
on.  
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the wired  
remote controller after [FILTER] lamp has gone on or when  
the filter check button (Temporary button) is pushed, time of  
the calculation timer is cleared. In this case, the measurement  
time is reset if the specified time has passed, and display on  
LCD and the display on the main unit disappear.  
12 Central control  
mode selection  
1) Setting at the central remote controller side enables to select the contents which  
can be operated on the remote controller at indoor unit side.  
2) Operation contents on the remote controller at indoor unit side  
[Last push priority] :  
The operation contents can be selected from both remote controller and the  
central controller of the indoor unit side, and the operation is performed with the  
contents selected at the last.  
[Center] :  
Start/Stop operation only can be handled on the remote controller at indoor unit  
side.  
[Operation Prohibited] :  
It cannot be operated on the remote controller at indoor unit side.  
(Stop status is held.)  
3) Display on the display part of the main unit or wired remote controller  
Setup on central  
control remote  
controller  
Display on wired remote Display on wired  
Display on main unit  
(Only in case of no wired remote  
controller  
(In case of RBC-AM1)  
remote controller  
(In case of RBC-AM1) controller)  
Last push priority  
[Central control] goes off. [Center] goes off.  
No display  
Center  
[Central control] goes on. [Center] goes on.  
[DEFROST] lamp (Orange) 1Hz flashes.  
[DEFROST] lamp (Orange) 5Hz flashes.  
Operation prohibited [Central control] flashes. [Center] flashes.  
NOTE : When a wired remote controller is connected, there is no display on the main unit.  
Energy-save  
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to be operated.  
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the range not to lose the comfort  
ability according to input values of various sensors.  
3) Data (Input value room temp.Ta, Outside temp.To, Air volume, Indoor heat  
exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for 20 minutes are taken the average to calculate  
correction value of the setup temperature.  
13  
control  
(By connected  
outdoor unit)  
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes, and the shifted range is as  
follows.  
In cooling time : +1.5 to 1.0K  
In heating time : 1.5 to +1.0K  
14 Max. frequency  
cut control  
1) This control is operated by selecting  
[AUTO] operation mode.  
2) COOL operation mode: the fre-  
quency is controlled according to the  
following figure if To < 28°C.  
Ta( C)  
+4  
Normal control  
Max. frequency is restricted  
to approximately the rated  
cooling frequency  
+3  
Tsc  
3) HEAT operation mode: the frequency  
is controlled according to the right  
figure if To > 15°C.  
Ta( C)  
Tsh  
Max. frequency is restricted  
to approximately the rated  
heating frequency  
-3  
-4  
Normal control  
55 –  
9-2. Indoor Control Circuit  
9-2-1. Print Circuit Board  
<Main P.C. board (MCC-1370A)>  
<Sub P.C. board (MCC-1370B)>  
56 –  
9-2-2. Outline of Main Controls  
1. Pulse ModulatingValve (PMV) control  
1) For PMV, SM560 is controlled with 45 to 500 pulses and SM800 with 50 to 500 pulses during operation,  
respectively.  
2) In cooling operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TC  
sensor.  
3) In heating operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TE  
sensor.  
4) For the temperature difference in items 2) and 3), 1 to 5K is aimed as the target in both cooling and  
heating operations.  
5) When the cycle excessively rose in both cooling and heating operations, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.  
The aimed value is usually 105°C for SM560 and 100°C for SM800 in both cooling and heating opera-  
tions.  
REQUIREMENT  
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the  
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance  
value an the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.  
2. Discharge temperature release control  
1) This function controls the operation frequency,  
TD [ C]  
that is, lowers the operation frequency when  
the discharge temperature has not lower or  
the discharge temperature has rapidly risen  
during PMV control. It subdivides the fre-  
quency control up to a unit of 0.6Hz to stabi-  
lize the cycle.  
Error stop ("P03" display with 4 times of error counts)  
Frequency down  
a
b
c
2) When the discharge temperature is detected  
in an abnormal stop zone, the unit stops the  
compressor and restarts after 2 minutes 30  
seconds. The error counter is cleared when it  
has continued the operation for 10 minutes.  
If the abnormal stop zone has been detected  
by 4 times without clearing of counter, an  
error P03is displayed.  
Frequency holding  
d
e
Frequency slow-up  
(Up to command)  
As command is  
* The cause is considered as excessively little  
amount of refrigerant, defective PMV, or  
clogging of cycle.  
[°C]  
a
SM560 117  
SM800 111  
b
c
d
e
112  
106  
108  
100  
105  
95  
98  
90  
3. Current release control  
[A]  
The output frequency and the output voltage are  
controlled by AC current value detected by T02  
on the outdoor P.C. board so that input current of  
the inverter does not exceed the specified value.  
Frequency down  
I1  
Hold  
SM560  
SM800  
Objective  
model  
Hold  
Normal operation  
10.5  
COOL HEAT COOL HEAT  
10.22 10.35 13.00 14.43  
I1 value [A]  
* For the cooling only models, only COOL is  
objective.  
57 –  
9-2-3. Indoor P.C. Board Optional Connector Specifications  
Connector Pin  
Function  
Specifications  
DC12V (COM)  
Remarks  
No.  
No.  
Option output  
CN60  
1
2
Defrost output  
ON during defrost operation of outdoor unit  
ON during Real thermo-ON (Comp ON)  
3
Thermo. ON output  
Cooling output  
4
ON when operation mode is in cooling system  
(COOL, DRY, COOL in AUTO cooling/heating)  
5
6
Heating output  
Fan output  
ON when operation mode is in heating system  
(HEAT, HEAT in AUTO cooling/heating)  
ON during indoor fan ON  
(Air purifier is used/Interlock cable)  
Outside error  
input  
CN80  
1
2
3
1
DC12V (COM)  
DC12V (COM)  
Outside error input  
(When continued for 1 minute)  
Check code L30is output and forced operation stops.  
Filter option  
error  
CN70  
CN71  
Filter/Option/Humidifier Option error input is controlled. (Protective operation  
setup input  
for device attached to outside is displayed.)  
2
0V  
* Setting of option error input is performed from  
remote controller. (DN=2A)  
CHK  
Operation check  
Used for operation check of indoor unit. (Communica-  
tion with outdoor unit or remote controller is not  
performed, but the specified operation such as indoor  
fan Hor drain pump ON is output.)  
1
2
Check mode input  
0V  
DISP display  
mode  
Display mode enables indoor unit and remote control-  
ler to communicate. (When power is turned on)  
CN72  
CN73  
1
2
1
2
Display mode input  
0V  
Demand input  
0V  
EXCT demand  
Forced thermo-OFF operation in indoor unit  
58 –  
12V power supply  
5V power supply  
MCU  
GND  
PMV output  
TD sensor  
TS sensor  
TE sensor  
TO sensor  
Case thermo  
Outdoor fan rpm input  
Outdoor fan output  
IGB module  
4-way valve output  
(Except cooling only models)  
Converter module  
Pump down switch  
12V power supply  
Contactor against  
night low-noise  
Case thermo  
PMV output  
5V power supply  
TD sensor  
TO sensor  
TE sensor  
TS sensor  
Communication  
between CDB and IPDU  
Existing pipe  
corresponding switch  
(SW 801)  
4-way valve  
output  
Outdoor fan output  
GND  
Status display LED  
MCU  
9-3-2. Outline of Main Controls  
1. Outdoor fan control (Object: SM80)  
Allocautions of fan tap revolutions [rpm]  
W1  
W2  
W3  
W4  
W5  
W6  
W7  
W8  
W9  
WA  
WB  
WC WD WE  
SM800  
250 270 290 310 340 370 400 440 480 520 560 610 700 780  
1) Cooling fan control  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor.  

(Cooling:Temperature conditions after medium  
term)  
TE [ C]  
The cooling fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC  
fan control (14 taps).  
MAX.  
+30 rpm / 20 sec.  
Hold zone  
46  
37  
34  
20  
At the activation time, although the maximum fan  
tap in the following table are fixed for 60 seconds,  
after then the fan may not rotate with high speed  
for several minutes because the fan is controlled  
by TE sensor value. It is not an abnormal status.  
30 rpm / 20 sec.  
MIN.  
When the discharge temperature sensor is  
abnormal or the sensor comes off the holder, the  
fan does not rotate with high speed, but a protec-  
tive device works.  
ƒ
When the outdoor fan does not rotate with high  
speed, judge a fan error by comparing the control  
data in the following table with TO and TE values.  
Control for fan tap by outdoor temperature in normal operation  
TO  
TO < 5°C  
5 TO <10°C 10 TO < 15°C 15 TO < 20°C 20 TO < 25°C 25°C TO  
TO error  
W1  
MIN  
W1  
W6  
W2  
W8  
W3  
WA  
W4  
W5  
WE  
WA  
WE  
MAX  
WC  
WE  
2) Heating fan control  
This control function lowers fan tap according to  
TE sensor value when outdoor temperature is  
high.  

TE [ C]  
When a status TE > 20°C is detected continu-  
ously for 5 minutes, the operation may stop. This  
status does not output an error code and is  
assumed as usual status of thermo-OFF.The fan  
restarts after approx. 2 minutes 30 seconds and  
this intermittent operation is not a trouble.  
60 rpm / 20 sec. STOP timer count  
60 rpm / 20 sec.  
24  
21  
17  
15  
30 rpm / 20 sec.  
If the status in item  
is frequently found, it is  
Hold zone  
ƒ
considered that the filter of suction part of the  
indoor unit is dirty. Clean the filter and restart the  
operation.  
+30 rpm / 20 sec.  
This control function does not work for 30 min-  
utes after activation, 1 minute after defrosting,  
and during defrost operation.  
61 –  
2. Outdoor fan control (Object: SM560)  
The outdoor fan is controlled by TO sensor and the revolutions frequency of the compressor (rps).  
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (8 taps). According to each operation mode,  
the fan is operated by selecting an outdoor fan operation tap in the following table based upon the conditions  
of TO sensor and the compressor operation (rps).  
Allocations of fan tap revolutions  
Tap  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
Revolutions per  
minute (rpm)  
SM560  
960  
870  
870  
870  
750  
700  
540  
390  
In cooling operation  
In heating operation  
Frequency of the  
compressor (rps)  
Frequency of the  
compressor (rps)  
To 14  
To 14  
35 to MAX  
To 14  
To 14  
35 to MAX  
TO 38°C  
F7  
F7  
F4  
F5  
F3  
F4  
TO 5.5°C  
F7  
F6  
F6  
F6  
F4  
F3  
TO < 38°C  
TO < 5.5°C  
3. Coil heating control  
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case  
heater. It purposes to prevent slackness of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.  
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation,  
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused. As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn  
on power of the compressor beforehand when starting operation after power of the compressor has been  
interrupted for a long time.  
3) A judgment for electricity is performed by TD and TO sensors. If TO sensor is defective, a backup control  
is automatically performed by TE sensor. For a case of defective TO sensor, judge it with the outdoor LED  
display.  
4) Coil heating is controlled by TD and TE sensor.  
5) For every model, the power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.  
(In trouble of sensor)  
TO [ C]  
TO [ C]  
18  
15  
10  
8
20  
18  
12  
10  
No power-ON  
No power-ON  
Power-ON condition  
TD < 30 C  
Continuous ON (L)  
Continuous ON (M)  
Continuous ON (L)  
Continuous ON (M)  
* TD sensor is read in once per 15 minut.es  
SM800  
L
20W and equivalent  
40W and equivalent  
M
(Object: SM560)  
TO [ C]  
No power-ON  
10  
9
Continuous ON (L)  
Continuous ON (M)  
Continuous ON (H)  
4
3
2
1
SM560  
L
M
H
10W and equivalent  
20W and equivalent  
30W and equivalent  
62 –  
NOTIFICATION  
It is not an abnormal phenomenon that electro-noise may be heard while heating the coil.  
4. Short intermittent operation preventive control  
The compressor may not stop for preventing the compressor for 3 to 10 minutes after start of the  
operation even if Thermo-OFF signal has been received from the indoor. This phenomenon is not  
abnormal. (Continuous operation time of the compressor differs according to the operating status.)  

If the equipment is stopped from the remote controller, the operation does not continue.  
5. High-voltage suppressionTE control (Only for SM800)  
This control suppresses that voltage becomes abnormally higher during cooling operation.  

ƒ
Stop the compressor under condition of TE 67°C, and count 1 on the error count.  
After 2 minutes 30 seconds passed, if TE < 67°C, the compressor restarts and the error count is  
cleared when the operation continues for 10 minutes.  
When TE 67°C is detected again within 10 minutes, 1 is added to the error count and restart is  
repeated.  
If the error counts 10 are recognized, it is determined as an error and restart is not performed. Error  
code P04is displayed.  
After restarting the compressor, continue controlling by using 70% to 90% of the control value of the  
current release control for minimum 30 minutes.  
6. Over-current preventive control  
This control function stops the compressor when over-current preventive circuit has detected an  

abnormal current.  
The compressor restarts with error count 1 after 2 minutes 30 seconds.  
ƒ
If the error counts 4 are recognized, it is determined as an error and restart is not performed. Error  
code H01, H02or P26is displayed.  
7. Current release value shift control  
1) Object: SM800  
This control function prevents troubles of the electron parts such as G-Tr of inverter of compressor  
drive system and troubles of the compressor during cooling operation.  

ƒ
This control function corrects the current release control value ( 1) in item 3 of 9-2-2 by TO sensor  
value.  
The value to be corrected is based upon the following control diagram and correction value table.  
Corrected value  
TO [ C]  
T
a
b
c
d
SM800  
39°C 40°C 60°C 80°C 85°C  
T+8  
T+7  
T+5  
T+4  
T+2  
T+1  
T
T-1  
I1 x a%  
I1 x b%  
I1 x c%  
I1 x d%  
As I1  
Current release value shift control  
2) Object: SM560  
TO  
45 TO  
SM560  
7.07  
The current release value of a single-phase model is se-  
lected from the right table according to TO sensor value.  
40 TO < 45  
7.90  
TO < 45  
10.22  
63 –  
8. Defrost control  
In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor temperature satisfies any  

condition in A zone to D zone.  
The defrost operation is immediately finished if TE sensor temperature has become 12°C or more, or  
it also is finished when condition of 7°C TE < 12°C has continued for 1 minute. The defrost operation  
is also finished when defrost operation has continued for 10 minutes even if TE sensor temperature  
has become 7°C or lower.  
After defrost operation has finished, the compressor and the outdoor fan start heating operation after  
stopped for approx. 50 seconds.  
ƒ
Start of heating operation  
10  
0
15  
c
b
a
d
[min]  
TE [ºC]  
5  
A zone  
10  
13  
B zone  
18  
D zone  
C zone  
*
* The minimum TE value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started is stored in memory as TE0.  
A zone  
B zone  
C zone  
D zone  
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE 3 continued for T seconds.  
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE 3 continued for T seconds.  
Defrost operation is performed when this zone continued for T seconds.  
Defrost operation is performed when this zone continued for T seconds.  
SM560  
28  
SM800  
34  
a
b
c
28  
40  
28  
55  
d
T
60  
90  
120  
120  
64 –  
10. TROUBLESHOOTING  
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting  
<Wired remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+ and screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
The following operations are normal.  

a) Compressor does not operate.  
Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
Does not thermostat turn off?  
Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
b) Indoor fan does not rotate.  
Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
c) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
Is not defrost operation performed?  
d) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
Is not automatic address being set up?  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the  
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
ƒ
Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?  
(2) Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble Confirmation of check code display Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE :  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to  
outer noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables  
of the remote controller to shield cables.  
65 –  
<Wireless remote controller type> (Only for 4-way air discharge cassette type models)  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+ and screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
The following operations are normal.  

a) Compressor does not operate.  
Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
Does not thermostat turn off?  
Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
b) Indoor fan does not rotate.  
Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
Is not defrost operation performed?  
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
Is not forced operation performed?  
Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
Is not automatic address being set up?  
Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  

Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation  
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Confirmation of lamp display  
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type wireless remote controller is connected)  
Check defective  
position and parts.  
Trouble →  
1) Outline of judgment  
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with  
the following method.  
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit  
(sensors of the receiving unit)  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis  
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.  
66 –  
10-2. Check Code List  
Error mode detected by indoor unit  
: Flash, : Go on, : Go off  
Wireless sensor  
lamp display  
Wired remote  
controller  
Diagnostic function  
Cause of operation  
Judgment and measures  
Status of air  
conditioner  
Condition  
Operation Timer Ready Check code  
E03  
No communication from remote controller (including wireless) Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.  
Handy remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)  
Central remote controller [97] check code  
and communication adapters  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
E04  
The serial signal is not output from outdoor unit to indoor unit. S top  
Miscabling of inter-unit cables  
Defective serial sensing circuit on outdoor P.C. board  
Defective serial receiving circuit on indoor P.C. board  
Displayed when 1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected  
Inter-unit cable check, correction of miscabling, case thermo operation  
Outdoor P.C. board check, P.C. board cables check  
2. In normal operation  
P.C. board (Indoor receiving/Outdoor sending) check  
E08  
L03  
L07  
L08  
L09  
Duplicated indoor unit addresses  
Duplicated indoor master units  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check whether there is modification of remote controller connection (Group/  
error is detected  
Individual) or not after power has been turned on (finish of group configuration/  
address check).  
There is group line in individual indoor units.  
Unsetting of indoor group address  
* If group configuration and address are not normal when the power has been turned  
on, the mode automatically shifts to address setup mode. (Resetting of address)  
Unset indoor capacity  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Set the indoor capacity. (DN=I1)  
error is detected  
L30  
P01  
P10  
Abnormal outside interlock input  
Fan motor thermal protection  
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.  
error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Displayed when 1. Check thermal relay of fan motor.  
error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Float switch operation  
Disconnection, coming-off, defective float switch contactor  
of float circuit  
Displayed when 1. Defect of drain pump  
error is detected 2. Clogging of drain pump  
3. Check float switch.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
P12  
P19  
Indoor DC fan error  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Defective detection of position  
error is detected 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operates.  
3. Lock of indoor fan  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Error in 4-way valve system  
Indoor heat exchanger temperature lowered after start of  
heating operation.  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check 4-way valve.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ) sensor.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
P31  
F01  
F02  
F10  
F29  
E10  
Own unit stops while warning is output to other indoor units.  
Stop (Sub unit)  
Displayed when 1. Judge sub unit while master unit is in [E03], [L03], [L07], [L08].  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of indoor heat exchanger  
sensor (TCJ)  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (TCJ).  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of indoor heat exchanger  
sensor (TC)  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (TC).  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of indoor heat exchanger  
sensor (TA)  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor heat exchanger temperature sensor (TA).  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Indoor EEPROM error  
EEPROM access error  
Stop  
Displayed when  
1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Communication error between indoor MCU  
Communication error between fan driving MCU and main  
MCU  
Stop  
Displayed when  
1. Check cables of remote controller.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check power cables of indoor unit.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
E18  
Regular communication error between master and sub indoor Stop  
units or between main and sub indoor units  
Displayed when 1. Check cables of remote controller.  
(Automatic reset) error is detected 2. Check indoor power cable.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board.  
Error mode detected by outdoor unit  
: Flash, : Go on, : Go off  
Wireless sensor  
lamp display  
Wired remote  
controller  
Diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Status of air  
Condition  
Cause of operation  
Breakdown of compressor  
Operation Timer Ready Check code  
conditioner  
H01  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check power voltage. AC200V 20V  
error is detected  
Displayed when error is detected  
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
3. Check current detection circuit at AC side.  
H02  
H03  
L29  
Compressor does not rotate.  
Displayed when 1. Trouble of compressor (Compressor lock, etc.) : Replace compressor.  
error is detected  
Over-current protective circuit operates after specified time  
passed when compressor had been activated.  
2. Defective cabling of compressor (Phase missing)  
3. Phase-missing operation of power supply (3-phase model)  
Current detection circuit error  
Displayed when 1. Compressor immediately stops even if restarted. : Check IPDU.  
error is detected  
Current value at AC side is high even during compressor-OFF.  
Phase of power supply is missed.  
2. Phase-missing operation of power supply  
Check 3-phase power voltage and cables.  
Outdoor unit and other errors  
Displayed when 1. Check cables of CDB and IPDU.  
error is detected  
Communication error between CDB and IPDU  
2. Abnormal overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
(Coming-off of connector)  
Heat sink temperature error  
(Detection of temperature over specified value)  
L31  
P03  
Phase detection protective circuit operates.  
(Normal models)  
Operation continues. Displayed when 1. Check power phase order (Reversed phase)/phase missing.  
(Compressor stops.) error is detected  
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.  
Displayed when 1. Check refrigerating cycle. (Gas leak)  
Discharge temperature error  
Discharge temperature over specified value was detected.  
Stop  
Stop  
Stop  
error is detected  
2. Trouble of PMV  
3. Check Td sensor.  
P04  
P22  
High-pressure protection error by TE sensor  
(Temperature over specified value was detected.)  
Displayed when 1. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
error is detected  
2. Check outdoor temperature sensor (TE).  
3. Check outdoor CDB P.C. board.  
Outdoor DC fan error  
Displayed when 1. Defective detection of position  
error is detected  
2. Over-current protective circuit of outdoor fan driving unit operates.  
3. Lock of outdoor fan  
4. Check outdoor CDB P.C. board.  
P26  
Inverter over-current protective circuit operates. (For a short time)  
Short voltage of main circuit operates.  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Inverter immediately stops even if restarted. : Compressor motor rare short  
error is detected  
2. Check IPDU. : Cabling error  
P29  
F04  
IPDU position detection circuit error  
Stop  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Position detection circuit operates even if operating compressor by removing  
error is detected 3P connector. : Replace IPDU.  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of outdoor temperature  
sensor (TD)  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temperature sensor (TD).  
error is detected 2. Check outdoor CDB P.C. board.  
F06  
F08  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of outdoor temperature  
sensor (TE/TS)  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temperature sensor (TE/TS).  
error is detected 2. Check outdoor CDB P.C. board.  
Coming-off, disconnection or short of outdoor temperature  
sensor (TO)  
Operation continues. Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temperature sensor (TO).  
error is detected  
2. Check outdoor CDB P.C. board.  
For an error mode detected in outdoor unit, the fan operates because sub unit of a group operation does not communicate with the outdoor unit.  
Error mode detected by remote controller or network adapter  
: Flash, : Go on, : Go off  
Wireless sensor  
lamp display  
Wired remote  
controller  
Diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Cause of operation  
Status of air conditioner  
Condition  
Operation Timer Ready  
Check code  
No check code No communication with master indoor unit  
Stop  
Remote controller power error, Defective indoor EEPROM  
1. Check remote controller inter-unit cables.  
2. Check remote controller.  
is displayed.  
(Remote  
Remote controller cable is not correctly  
connected.  
controller does Power of indoor unit is not turned on.  
3. Check indoor power cables.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
not operate.)  
Automatic address cannot be completed.  
5. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)  
: Phenomenon of automatic address repetition occurred.  
E01*2  
No communication with indoor master unit  
Disconnection of inter-unit cable between  
remote controller and master indoor unit  
(Detected at remote controller side)  
Stop  
Displayed when Signal receiving of remote controller is defective.  
error is detected 1. Check remote controller inter-unit cables.  
2. Check remote controller.  
(Automatic restart)  
* When there is center, operation  
continues.  
3. Check indoor power cables.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board.  
E02  
Signal sending error to indoor unit  
(Detected at remote controller side)  
Stop  
Displayed when Signal sending of remote controller is defective.  
error is detected 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote controller.  
: Replace remote controller.  
(Automatic restart)  
* When there is center, operation  
continues.  
E09  
L20  
Multiple master remote controllers are recognized. Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check there are multiple master units for 2 remote controllers  
(Detected at remote controller side)  
(Sub unit continues operation.)  
error is detected  
(including wireless).  
: Master unit is one and others are sub units.  
Duplicated indoor central addresses on  
Stop  
Displayed when 1. Check address setup of central control system network.  
communication of central control system (AI-NET) (Automatic restart)  
(Detected by central controller side)  
error is detected  
(Network adapter SW01)  
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
Central remote  
controller  
98  
*3  
Multiple network adapters on remote controller  
communication line  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Operation continues.  
Operation continues.  
Displayed when 1. Check multiple network adapters.  
error is detected 2. Check inter-unit cable/miscabling of remote controller.  
: Only one network adapter on remote controller communication line  
Central remote  
controller  
99  
*3  
Interruption of central control system (AI-NET)  
communication circuit  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Displayed when 1. Check communication line/miscabling. Check power of indoor unit.  
(According to handy remote controller) error is detected 2. Check communication. (XY terminals)  
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.  
Central remote  
controller  
97  
4. Check central controller (such as central control remote controller, etc.).  
Indoor Gr sub unit error  
(Detected by central controller side)  
Continuation/stop  
(Based on a case)  
Displayed when Check the check code of corresponding unit by handy remote controller.  
error is detected  
Central remote  
controller  
b7  
*2 Check code is not displayed by wired remote controller. (Usual operation of air conditioner is disabled.)  
For wireless type models, E01 is notified by the display lamp.  
*3 These errors are related to communication of remote controllers (A, B) and central system (AI-NET, X, Y), and [E01], [E02], [E03], [E09], or [E18] is displayed or no check code is displayed on the  
remote controller according to the error contents.  
10-3. Error Mode Detected by LED on Outdoor P.C. Board  
<SW800: LED display in bit 1, bit 2, bit 3 OFF>  
When multiple errors are detected, the latest error is displayed.  
When LED display is (Go on), there is the main cause of trouble on the objective part of control at CDB  
side and the unit stops.  
When LED display is (Flash), there is the main cause of trouble on the objective part of control at IPDU  
side and the unit stops.  
When case thermostat operates, the communication is interrupted on the serial circuit. If continuing the case  
thermostat operation, a serial communication error occurs because serial sending to the indoor unit is inter-  
rupted.  
Check code  
LED display  
No.  
Item  
D800  
(Red)  
D801  
(Yellow)  
D802  
(Yellow)  
D803  
(Yellow)  
Type A  
Type B  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TE sensor error  
F06  
F04  
F06  
F08  
P03  
P22  
18  
19  
18  
1B  
1E  
1A  
TD sensor error  
TS sensor error  
TO sensor error  
Discharge temp. error  
DC outdoor fan error  
Communication error  
between IPDU  
CDB side  
7
L29  
1C  
(Abnormal stop)  
High-pressure release  
operation  
21  
8
9
P04  
EEPROM error  
Communication error  
10 between IPDU  
(No abnormal stop)  
G-Tr short-circuit  
protection  
11  
P26  
14  
12 Detection circuit error  
13 Current sensor error  
14 Phase missing detection  
15 Comp. lock error  
P29  
H03  
H03  
H02  
H01  
16  
17  
17  
1D  
1F  
IPDU side  
16 Comp. breakdown  
: Go on : Go off : Flash (5Hz)  
<<Check code>>  
The check codes are classified into Type A and Type B according to the used remote controller. Be sure to  
check the remote controller which you use.  
Type A :  
Neutral 2-cores type wired remote controller such as RBC-AMT21E, RBC-AS21E, and wireless remote control-  
ler kit such as TCB-AX21U (W)-E  
Type B :  
Polarized 3-cores type wired remote controller such as RBC-SR1-PE, RBC-SR2-PE, and central control remote  
controller such as RBC-CR64-PE  
70 –  
10-4. Troubleshooting Procedure for Each Check Code  
10-4-1. New Check Code/Present Check Code (Central Control Side)  
[E01 error]/ [99 error]  
*
:When central controller [99] is displayed, there are other causes of error.  
*
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable of remote controller.  
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection  
or contact error of connector on harness  
from terminal block of indoor unit?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit cables.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
YES  
NO  
Check power connection of indoor unit.  
(Turn on power again.)  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
YES  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
Is power supplied to remote controller?  
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
YES  
Correct as a master unit/a sub unit  
(Remote controller address connector)  
Are two remote controllers  
set without master unit?  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
[E09 error]/ [99 error]  
*
:When central controller [99] is displayed, there are other causes of error.  
*
YES  
Correct as a master unit/a sub unit  
(Remote controller address connector)  
Are two remote controllers  
set without master unit?  
NO  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
– 71 –  
[E04 error]/[04 error]  
NO  
Does outdoor unit operate?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is setup of group address correct?  
YES  
Check item code [14].  
Correct inter-unit cable.  
Are 1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables normal?  
YES  
Are connections from connectors  
of inter-terminal blocks (1, 2, 3)  
of indoor/outdoor units normal?  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402).  
Does voltage between  
2 and 3 of inter-terminal blocks (1, 2, 3)  
of indoor unit vary?*  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
As shown in the following figure,  
perform measurement within  
20 seconds after power ON.  
*
S5277G  
Black  
White  
3
2
1
Inter-terminal block  
For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
main circuit on control  
P.C. board  
Is DC280V applied between  
terminals of electrolytic capacitor  
of IPDU main circuit?  
NO  
Replace IPDU.  
YES  
For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
check case thermo.  
Is DC7V power supplied to CDB?  
NO  
NO  
Replace IPDU.  
Are cablings between Pin 2 and Pin 5  
of CN800 and between IPDU  
and CDB normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Is case thermo (CN500) connected?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
NO  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Does case thermo operate?  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
Check CDB.  
Defect Replace  
Check/Correct charged  
refrigerant amount.  
72 –  
[E10 error]/[CF error]  
<Only for 4-way air discharge cassette type (RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E)>  
Check indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
Defect  
Replace  
[E18 error]/[97 error] [99 error]  
*
:When central controller [99] is displayed, there are other causes of trouble.  
*
NO  
Correct inter-unit cable of remote controller.  
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?  
YES  
Is there no disconnection  
or contact error of connector on harness  
from terminal block of indoor unit?  
YES  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit cables.  
NO  
NO  
Is group control operation?  
NO  
Is power of all indoor units turned on?  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
Check power connection of indoor unit.  
(Turn on power again.)  
Defect  
Replace  
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]/ [96 error] [99 error]  
*
:When central controller [99] is displayed, there are other causes of trouble.  
*
E08 : Duplicated indoor unit numbers  
L03 :Two or more master units in a group control  
L07 : One or more group addresses of [Individual] in a group control  
L08 : Unset indoor group address (99)  
If the above is detected when power has been turned on, the mode automatically enters in automatic ad-  
dress setup mode. (Check code is not displayed.)  
However, if the above is detected during automatic address setup mode, the check code may be displayed.  
[L09 error]/[46 error]  
YES  
Set capacity data of indoor unit.  
(Setup item code (DN) = 11)  
Is capacity of indoor unit unset?  
NO  
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402).  
Defect  
Replace  
– 73 –  
[L20 error]/[98 error]  
NO  
NO  
Are cable connections to  
Correct cable connection  
communication line X, Y normal?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
Is central controller [98] displayed?  
YES  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
Is indoor remote controller  
[L20] displayed?  
YES  
Are not multiple  
same central control network  
addresses connected?  
YES  
Correct central control network address.  
NO  
Check central controller  
(including network adapter).  
Defect  
Replace.  
[L30 error]/[B6 error]  
Check indoor P.C. board  
NO  
NO  
Are outside devices of  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
connector CN80 connected?  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
Check outside devices.  
Defect Replace  
Do outside devices normally operate?  
YES  
Check operation cause.  
[b7 error] (Central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Is group operation performed?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
Is check code displayed on sub unit  
of main or sub remote controller?  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
Check corresponding  
indoor/outdoor units.  
74 –  
[P10 error]/[Ob error]  
NO  
Is connection of float switch connector  
(Indoor control P.C. board CH34) normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
NO  
Does float switch operate?  
YES  
NO  
Check and correct cabling/wiring.  
Is circuit cabling normal?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Does drain pump operate?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
NO  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Is power of drain pump turned on?  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
Replace drain pump.  
Check cabling.  
Check drain pipe, etc.  
[F10 error] [0C error]  
NO  
Is connection of TA sensor connector  
(indoor P.C. board CN104) normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TA sensor.  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of TA sensor  
resistance value normal?  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-1.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
75 –  
[P12 error]/[11 error]  
<Only for 4-way air discharge cassette type models (RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E)>  
Turn off the power.  
Are not there connections errors or  
disconnection on connectors CN333 and CN334  
of indoor unit P.C. board (MCC-1402)?  
YES  
Correct connection of connector.  
NO  
Remove connectors CN333 and  
CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board  
(MCC-1402).  
NO  
Does the fan rotate without trouble  
when handling the fan with hands?  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
YES  
Are resistance values between phases  
at fan motor connector CN333 motor side of  
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) correct? *1  
NO  
1
YES  
*
1
3
Are not coil windings between  
(Red lead) and  
(White lead),  
3
5
between  
5
(White lead) and  
(Black lead), between  
(Red lead) opened or shorted?  
1
(Black lead) and  
For resistance, see the following values.  
AIU-P401H/HR, P451, P501, P561, P631, P711, P801  
Approx. 70 to 100  
AIU-P1121H/HR, P1401, P1601  
Approx. 35 to 50  
Is not earthed between cabinet and 1, 3, 5  
10M or more  
Is resistance value of fan motor connector  
CN333 at motor side of indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402) correct? *2  
NO  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
2
YES  
*
Check resistance of fan motor position detection circuit.  
1
4
Is not coil winding between  
(Yellow lead) and  
(Pink lead)  
opened or shorted?  
NO  
Resistance: Approx. 5 to 20k  
Is signal output of indoor fan motor  
position detection correct? *3  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
YES  
3
*
Check fan motor position detection signal.  
Using a tester, measure the voltage between CN334  
1
5
and  
of  
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1402) under condition that CN333 and  
CN334 are mounted and the power is turned on.  
Rotate the fan slowly with hands,  
and check the pin voltage  
swings between 0 to 5V voltage.  
4
5
Between  
and  
: 5V  
CN333  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402).  
Defect  
Replace  
CN334  
76 –  
[P22 error]/[1A error]  
(RAV-SM800AT-E)  
Are connections of CN301 and  
CN300 of P.C. board correct?  
YES  
Does the fan rotate without trouble  
NO  
NO  
CN301  
when handling the fan with hands under condition  
of removing CN301 and CN300 from P.C. board?  
YES  
The status that the resistance values  
between leads below are 50 to 80  
for 40W motor (ICF-140-40) and 25 to 55  
for 60W motor (ICF-140-60-1) is normal.  
1
2
2
Between  
Between  
Between  
(Red lead) and  
(White lead)  
(Black lead)  
3
(White lead) and  
(Black lead) and  
(Red lead)  
3
1
of motor winding of connector (CN301)  
CN300  
YES  
* Connector of RAV-SM560AT-E differs from  
that of RAV-SM800AT-E.  
The status that there is  
NO  
5k to 20k resistance values between  
CN300: Motor coil winding  
CN301: Motor position detection  
1
(Yellow lead) and  
4
(Pink lead)  
of motor position detection of  
connector (CN300) is normal.  
YES  
Normal fan motor  
(Control or CDB P.C. board)  
Defective fan motor  
(Control P.C. board or CDB P.C. board)  
NOTE :  
However, GND circuit error inside of the motor is rarely detected even if the above check is carried out.  
When the circuit does not become normal even if P.C. board has been replaced, replace outdoor fan motor.  
Single phase  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
Control P.C. board  
CN300  
Single phase  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
CDB P.C. board  
CN301  
Objective P.C. board  
Fan motor winding  
Motor position detection  
Fan motor winding  
CN301  
CN300  
Motor position detection  
77 –  
[P19 error]/[08 error]  
Is voltage applied  
to 4-way valve coil terminal  
in heating operation?  
NO  
NO  
Is operation of  
4-way valve normal?  
YES  
YES  
Is flow of refrigerant  
by electron expansion  
valve normal?  
NO  
Check 4-way valve  
Defect Replace  
YES  
Check and replace  
electron expansion  
valve.  
NO  
Is circuit cable normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit.  
Are characteristics  
of TC sensor resistance  
value normal?  
NO  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
NO  
Check CDB P.C. board.  
YES  
Replace TC sensor.  
Check CDB P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Check indoor P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, check control P.C. board.  
• In cooling operation, if high pressure is abnormally raised, [P19 error]/[08 error] may be displayed. In this  
case, remove cause of pressure up and then check again referring to the item [P04 error]/[21 error].  
[F02 error]/[0d error]  
NO  
Is connection of TC sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
(Indoor P.C. board CN101) normal?  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TC sensor resistance value normal?  
Replace TC sensor.  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402).  
Defect  
Replace  
– 78 –  
[F01 error]/[0F error]  
NO  
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector  
(Indoor P.C. board CN102) normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TCJ sensor.  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
[P26 error]/[14 error]  
NO  
Improve the power supply line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit cables.  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check and correct reactor connection.  
NO  
Are connections of  
cabling/connector normal?  
YES  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
check RY01 on the control P.C. board.  
Are not P26and 14errors output  
YES  
NO  
Does RY01 relay of  
IPDU operate?  
when an operation is performed by  
removing 3P connector of compressor?  
NO  
YES  
* Single-phase type is not  
provided to RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Replace IPDU.  
YES  
Is not AC fuse fused?  
NO  
* Replace control P.C. board  
of RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Replace IPDU.  
NO  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
* Replace control P.C. board  
of RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Check IPDU.  
Defect Replace  
Check rare short of compressor trouble.  
Defect Replace  
79 –  
[P29 error]/[16 error]  
NO  
NO  
Check and correct circuit cabling  
such as cabling to compressor.  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
YES  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Replace  
Replace  
Replace  
Is not earthed?  
NO  
YES  
Is not winding shorted?  
(Is resistance between windings 0.6 to 1.2 ?)  
NO  
YES  
Is not winding opened?  
NO  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
[H03 error]/[17 error]  
NO  
Are cablings of power and  
current sensor normal?  
Check and correct circuit cables.  
YES  
Check IPDU.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
80 –  
[F06 error]/[18 error]  
Are connections of  
TE/TS sensor connectors of  
CDB CN604/CN605 normal?  
NO  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
* (For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN600 TE sensor and CN603 TS sensor)  
NO  
Are characteristics of TE/TS sensor  
resistance values normal?  
Replace TE and TS sensors.  
YES  
Check CDB.  
* Refer to Characteristics-3.  
Defect  
Replace  
[F04 error]/[19 error]  
NO  
Is connection of TD sensor connector  
of CDB CN600 normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TD sensor.  
YES  
* (For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN601 TD sensor)  
NO  
Are characteristics of TD sensor  
resistance value normal?  
YES  
Check control P.C. board.  
* Refer to Characteristics-4.  
Defect  
Replace  
[F08 error]/[1b error]  
NO  
Is connection of TO sensor connector  
of CDB CN601 normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TO sensor.  
YES  
* (For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN602 TO sensor)  
NO  
Are characteristics of TO sensor  
resistance value normal?  
YES  
Check CDB.  
* Refer to Characteristics-5.  
Defect  
Replace  
81 –  
[L29 error]/[1C error]  
Are connections of  
CDB CN800 and CDB IPDU CN06  
connectors normal?  
NO  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check cabling between IPDU  
and CDB and connector.  
Was the error just after  
power ON determined?  
Are cabling/connector normal?  
YES  
NO  
IPDU P.C. board error  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
NO  
Improve and eliminate the cause.  
Is there no abnormal overload?  
NO  
Is IPDU P.C. board come to  
closely contact with heat sink?  
Correct mounting.  
YES  
IPDU P.C. board error  
Defect  
Replace  
[H02 error]/[1d error]  
NO  
Improve power line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit cabling such  
as cabling to compressor  
(phase missing) and connector.  
NO  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is there no  
slackened refrigerant?  
Compressor lock  
Replace  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check TE and TS sensors. Replace  
Check electron expansion valve. Replace  
Does electron expansion  
valve normally operate?  
YES  
Check IPDU and CDB.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
82 –  
[P03 error]/[1E error]  
NO  
NO  
Correct the cabling and  
connection of connector.  
Is protective control such as  
discharge temprelease control normal?  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
YES  
Check parts. Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Check and correct the charged  
refrigerant amount.  
Is charged refrigerant amount normal?  
YES  
YES  
Improve and delete the cause  
Replace TD sensor.  
Check CDB.  
Is not abnormal overload?  
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TD sensor resistance value normal?  
* Refer to Characteristics-4.  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
[H01 error]/[1F error]  
NO  
Improve power line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Improve and delete the cause.  
Is not abnormal overload?  
NO  
Is the circuit detected by  
current sensor normal?  
Check and correct circuit cables.  
Check IPDU.  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
83 –  
[P04 error]/[21 error]  
Is high-voltage  
protective operation by  
TE sensor normal?  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Correct connection of  
cabling connector.  
Is connection of cabling  
connector normal?  
YES  
Check TE sensor.  
Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Does cooling outdoor fan  
normally operate?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection of  
connector.  
Is connection of  
connector normal?  
YES  
Replace fan motor.  
Is fan motor normal?  
YES  
NO  
Does PMV normally operate?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Do not TD and TO sensors  
Correct coming-off.  
come off the detection part?  
YES  
Check TE, TC, TS sensors.  
Replace electron expansion valve.  
Are characteristics of  
TD, TO, TC sensor resistance  
values normal?  
Replace TD, TO,  
and TC sensors.  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-3 and 4.  
Check charged refrigerant amount.  
Check liquid/gas valves.  
Check abnormal overload.  
Check CDB.  
Defect Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace control P.C. board.  
84 –  
[97 error] (Central controller)  
NO  
NO  
Correct communication line.  
Is X, Y communication line normal?  
YES  
Are connections between connectors  
CN02, CN03 of network adapter P.C. board  
and connectors CN309, CN41 of indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403, normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
NO  
Check connections of A, B terminal blocks.  
Correct communication line of remote controller.  
Is A, B communication line normal?  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Correct power cable.  
Turn on the source power supply.  
Clear the check code.  
Is there no connection error of power line?  
NO  
Is not power of source power supply turned on?  
NO  
Did a power failure occur?  
NO  
YES  
YES  
Is the network address changed  
form remote controller?  
NO  
Eliminate noise, etc.  
Is there no noise source, etc.?  
NO  
NO  
(Same as others)  
Can central remote controller  
control normally other indoor units?  
Is handling of central remote controller reflected  
on the operation status of indoor unit?  
Check central controller.  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
NO  
Does network adapter P.C. board  
LED (D01) go on?  
YES  
NO  
Can handy remote controller control  
normally other indoor units?  
YES  
Check indoor P.C. board  
Check network adapter P.C. board and power transformer.  
Defect Replace  
(MCC-1402 or MCC-1403).  
Defect  
Replace  
85 –  
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)  
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal sent from the main remote controller (and  
central controller).  
In this case, check the communication cables of the remote controllers A and B, the central control system X  
andY. As communication is disabled, [E03] is not displayed on the main remote controller and the central  
controller. [E01] is displayed on the main remote controller and [97 error] on the central controller, respectively.  
If [E03] occurs during an operation, the air conditioner stops.  
[F29 error] / [12 error]  
[F29 error] or [12 error] indicates detection of trouble which occurred on IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM)  
on the indoor unit P.C. board during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.  
* If EEPROM has not been inserted when the power was turned on or if EEPROM data never be read/written,  
the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, the central controller displays [97 error].  
(Power ON)  
(Approx. 3 minutes)  
[SET] is displayed on  
main remote controller.  
(Approx. 1 minute)  
[SET] goes off.  
(Repetition)  
LED (D02) on  
indoor unit P.C. board flashes  
with 1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.  
Reboot  
(Reset)  
[P31 error] (Sub indoor unit)  
When the master unit of a group operation has detected [E03], [L03], [L07], or [L08] error, the sub unit of the  
group operation detects [P31 error] and then it stops. There is no display of the check code or alarm history of  
the main remote controller.  
(In this model, the mode enters in automatic address set mode when the master unit has detected [E03], [L03],  
[L07], or [L08] error.)  
86 –  
10-4-2. Relational Graph ofTemperature Sensor Resistance Value andTemperature  
20  
40  
TA sensor  
TC,TCJ sensor  
Caracteristics-2  
30  
Caracteristics-1  
Resistance  
(k )  
Resistance  
(k )  
10  
20  
10  
0
0
10 20 30  
40 50  
10  
0
10 20  
30 40 50 60 70  
Temperature [ C]  
Temperature [ C]  
TE, TO, TS sensor  
20  
200  
Caracteristics-3  
Resistance  
Resistance  
(k )  
(k )  
(10 C or higher)  
10  
(10 C or lower)  
100  
0
0
-10  
0
10 20 30  
40 50 60 70  
Temperature [ C]  
TD sensor  
20  
200  
Caracteristics-4  
Resistance  
Resistance  
(k )  
(50 C or lower)  
(k )  
(50 C or higher)  
10  
100  
0
0
50  
100  
Temperature [ C]  
87 –  
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE INDOOR P.C. BOARD  
[Requirement when replacing the service indoor P.C. board assembly]  
In the non-volatile memory (Hereinafter said EEPROM, IC10) installed on the indoor P.C. board before replace-  
ment, the type and capacity code exclusive to the corresponding model have been stored at shipment from the  
factory and the important setup data such as system/indoor/group address set in (AUTO/MANUAL) mode or  
setting of high ceiling selection have been stored at installation time. Replace the service indoor P.C. board  
assembly according to the following procedure.  
After replacement, check the indoor unit address and also the cycle by a test run.  
<REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE>  
CASE 1  
Before replacement, power of the indoor unit can be turned on and the setup data can be readout from  
the wired remote controller.  
Read EEPROM data *1 (ref. P89)  
ò
Replace service P.C. board & power ON *2 (ref. P89)  
ò
Write the read data to EEPROM *3 (ref. P90)  
ò
Power reset (All indoor units in the group when group operation)  
CASE 2  
Before replacement the setup data can not be readout from the wired remote controller.  
Replace service P.C. board & power ON *2 (ref. P89)  
ò
Write the data such as high ceiling setup to EEPROM (According to the customers’ information) *3  
ò
Power reset (All indoor units in the group when group operation)  
– 88 –  
r1 Readout of the setup data from EEPROM  
(Data in EEPROM contents, which have been changed at the local site, are read out together with data in  
EEPROM set at shipment from the factory.)  
SET  
1. Push  
,
, and  
buttons of the remote controller at the same time for 4 seconds or more.  
1
(Corresponded with No. in Remote controller)  
When group operation, the master indoor unit address is displayed at the first time. In this time, the item  
code (DN) 10  
2. Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit address in the group are displayed successively.  
is displayed. The fan of the selected indoor unit operates and the flap starts s2winSgipnegciiffyatnhye.  
indoor unit No. to be replaced.  
3. Using the set temperature  
/
buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved up and down one by one.3  
4. First change the item code (DN) from 10 to 01. (Setting of filter sign lighting time) Make a note of the set  
data displayed in this time.  
5. Next change the item code (DN) using the set temperature  
/
buttons. Also make a note of the set data.  
6. Repeat item 5. and make a note of the important set data as shown in the later table (Ex.).  
01 to 9F  
7. After finishing making a note, push  
button to return the status to usual stop status.  
are provided in the item code (DN). On the way of operation, DN No. may6come out.  
(Approx. 1 minute is required to start handling of the remote controller.)  
Minimum requirements for item code  
DN  
Contents  
(1) Type and capacity of the indoor unit is necessary to set the revolutions  
frequency of the fan.  
10 Type  
11 Indoor unit capacity  
12 Line address  
(2) If Line/Indoor/Group addresses differ from those before replacement,  
the mode enters in automatic address setup mode and a manual  
resetting may be required.  
13 Indoor address  
14 Droup address  
r2 Replacement of service P.C. board  
1. Replace the P.C. board with a service P.C. board.  
In this time, setting of jumper line (cut) or setting of (short-circuit) connecting connectors on the former P.C.  
board should be reflected on the service P.C. board.  
2. According to the system configuration, turn on power of the indoor unit with any method in the following items.  
a) In case of single (individual) operation  
Turn on the power supply.  
1) Wait for completion of automatic address setup mode (Required time: Approx. 5 minutes) and then  
proceed to r3.  
(Line address = 1, Indoor address = 1, Group address = 0 (Individual) are automatically set.)  
SET  
2) Push  
,
, and  
buttons of the remote controller at the same time for 4 seconds or more  
(
1
operation), interrupt the automatic address setup mode, and then proceed to r3.  
(Unit No. ALL is displayed.)  
b) In case of group operation  
Turn on power of the indoor unit of which P.C. board has been replaced with the service P.C. board with  
any method in the following items.  
1) Turn on power of the replaced indoor unit only.  
(However, the remote controller is also connected. Otherwise r3 operation cannot be performed.)  
Same as 1) and 2) in item a).  
2) Turn on power of the multiple indoor units including replaced indoor unit.  
Only 1 system for twin, triple, double twin  
For all units in the group  
Wait for completion of automatic address setup mode (Required time: Approx. 5 minutes) and then  
proceed to r3.  
* The master unit of a group may change by setup of automatic address.The line address/indoor address of the  
replaced indoor unit are automatically set to the vacant addresses except addresses belonging to other indoor  
units which have not been replaced. It is recommended to make a note that the refrigerant line which includes  
the corresponding indoor unit and that the corresponding indoor unit is master or sub in the group control.  
– 89 –  
r3 Writing of the setup contents to EEPROM  
(The contents of EEPROM installed on the service P.C. board have been set up at shipment from1the factory.)  
SET  
1. Push  
,
, and  
buttons of the remote controller at the same time for 4 seconds or more.  
(Corresponded with No. in Remote controller )  
In group operation control, the master indoor unit No. is displayed at the first time. (If the automatic address  
setup mode is interrupted in item 2. - a) - 2) in the previous page, the unit No. ALL is displayed.) In this time,  
the item code (DN) 10 is displayed. The fan of the selected indoor unit operates and the flap starts swinging  
if any.  
2. Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are displayed successively.  
2
Specify the indoor unit No. of which P.C. board has been replaced with a service P.C. board.  
(When the unit No. ALL is displayed, this operation cannot be performed.)  
3. Using the set temperature  
/
buttons, the item code (DN) can be moved up and down one by one. 3  
4. First set a type and capacity of the indoor unit.  
(Setting the type and capacity writes the data at shipment from the factory in EEPROM.)  
1) Set the item code (DN) to 10. (As it is)  
2) Using the timer time  
/
buttons, set up a type.  
(For example, 4-way air discharge cassette type is 0001) Refer to the attached table.  
4
SET  
3) Push  
button. (OK when the display goes on.)  
5
4) Using the set temperature  
5) Using the timer time  
/
buttons, set 11 to the item code (DN).  
/
buttons, set the capacity.  
(For example, 0012 for class 80) Refer to the attached table.  
SET  
6) Push  
7) Push  
button. (OK when the display goes on.)  
button to return the status to usual stop status.  
6
(Approx. 1 minute is required to start handling of the remote controller.)  
5. Next write the contents which have been set up at the local site such as the address setup in EEPROM.  
Repeat the above procedure 1. and 2.  
6. Using the set temperature  
/
buttons, set 01 to the item code (DN).  
(Setup of lighting time of filter sign)  
7. The contents of the displayed setup data in this time should be agreed with the contents in the previous  
memorandum in r1.  
1) If data disagree, change the displayed setup data to that in the previous memorandum by the timer time  
SET  
/
buttons, and then push  
button. (OK when the display goes on.)  
2) There is nothing to do when data agrees.  
8. Using the set temperature  
buttons, change the item code (DN).  
/
As same as the above, check the contents of the setup data and then change them to data contents in the  
previous memorandum.  
9. Then repeat the procedure 7. and 8.  
<REMOTE CONTROLLER>  
10. After completion of setup, push  
the status to the usual stop status.  
button to return  
6
(Approx. 1 minute is required to start handling of  
the remote controller.)  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
* 01 to 9F are provided in the item code (DN).  
R.C. No.  
On the way of operation, DN No. may come out.  
SET  
When data has been changed by mistake and  
button has been pushed, the data can be returned  
4
1
to the data before change by pushing  
the item code (DN) was not yet changed.  
button if  
6
UNIT  
3
SET CL  
5
2
90 –  
Memorandum for setup contents (Item code table (Example))  
DN  
Item  
Memo  
At shipment  
According to type  
01 Filter sign lighting time  
02 Dirty state of filter  
03 Central control address  
06 Heating suction temp shift  
0F Cooling only  
0000: Standard  
0099: Unfixed  
0002: +2°C (Floor type: 0)  
0000: Shared for cooling/heating  
According to model type  
According to capacity type  
0099: Unfixed  
10 Type  
11 Indoor unit capacity  
12 Line address  
13 Indoor unit address  
14 Group address  
0099: Unfixed  
0099: Unfixed  
19 Flap type (Adjustment of air direction)  
According to type  
1E Temp difference of automatic cooling/  
heating selecting control points  
0003: 3 deg (Ts 1.5)  
28 Automatic reset of power failure  
2A Option  
0000: None  
0002:  
2b Thermo output selection (T10 B)  
2E Option  
0000: Thermo ON  
0000:  
32 Sensor selection  
0000: Body sensor  
0000: Standard  
0000: Available  
0000: None  
5d High ceiling selection  
60 Timer set (Wired remote controller)  
8b Correction of high heat feeling  
Type  
Item code [10]  
Setup data  
Type  
Abbreviated name  
RAV-SM560/800TU-E  
RAV-SM560/800BT-E  
0001*  
0006  
4-way air discharge cassette  
Concealed duct  
* Initial setup value of EEPROM installed on the service P.C. board  
Indoor unit capacity  
Item code [11]  
Setup data  
0000*  
Model  
Invalid  
56  
0009  
0012  
80  
* Initial setup value of EEPROM installed on the service P.C. board  
91 –  
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS  
12-1. Indoor Unit  
12-1-1. Test Run Setup on Remote Controller  
<Wired remote controller>  
1. When pushing  
Then push  
button on the remote controller for 4 seconds or more, TESTis displayed on LC display.  
button.  
• “TESTis displayed on LC display during operation of Test Run.  
During Test Run, temperature cannot be adjusted but air volume can be selected.  
In heating and cooling operation, a command to fix the Test Run frequency is output.  
Detection of error is performed as usual. However, do not use this function except case of Test Run be-  
cause it applies load on the unit.  
2. Use either heating or cooling operation mode for [TEST].  
NOTE : The outdoor unit does not operate after power has been turned on or for approx. 3 minutes after  
operation has stopped.  
3. After a Test Run has finished, push  
button again and check that [TEST] on LC display has gone off.  
(To prevent a continuous test run operation, 60-minutes timer release function is provided to this remote  
controller.)  
<Wireless remote controller> (Option for 4-way air discharge cassette type)  
1. Turn off power of the unit.  
Remove the adjuster attached with sensors from the ceiling panel. For removing, refer to the Installation  
manual attached to the ceiling panel. (Be careful to handle the adjuster because cables are connected to the  
sensor.) Remove the sensor cover from the adjuster. (1 screw)  
2. Change ON of Bit [1:TEST] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003] to OFF.  
Mount the sensor cover and mount the adjuster with sensor to the ceiling panel.  
Turn on power of the unit.  
3. Push  
button on the wireless remote controller and select [COOL] or [HEAT] operation mode using  
button. (All the display lamps of sensors on the wireless remote controller flash during Test Run.)  
Do not perform Test Run operation in other modes than [HEAT] / [COOL] mode.  
Detection of error is performed as usual.  
4. After Test Run operation, push  
5. Turn off power of the unit.  
button to stop the operation.  
Return Bit [1] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003] to the original position. (ON OFF)  
Mount the adjuster with sensors to the ceiling panel.  
Bit 1 : OFF to ON  
S003  
ON  
Sensor cover  
Sensor P.C. board  
Adjust corner cap  
92 –  
12-1-2. Setup to Select Function  
<Procedure> Use this function while the indoor unit stops.  
SET  
1
Push  
,
, and  
buttons concurrently for 4 seconds or more.  
The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates the indoor unit address of the master unit in the group control.  
In this time, fan and flap of the selected indoor unit operate.  
2
Every pushing  
button, the indoor unit numbers in the group control are displayed successively.  
In this time, fan and flap of the selected indoor unit only operate.  
3
4
5
Using the set temperature  
/
buttons, set the item code (DN).  
Using the timer time  
/
buttons, select the setup data.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on.)  
To change the selected indoor unit, proceed to  
To change the item to be set, proceed to  
2
.
3.  
6
Pushing  
button returns the status to usual stop status.  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
R.C. No.  
4
6
UNIT  
3
1
SET CL  
5
2
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
93 –  
Item No. (DN) table (Selection of function)  
DN  
Item  
Description  
At shipment  
01 Filter sign lighting  
time  
0000 : None  
0002 : 2500H  
0004 : 10000H  
0001 : 150H  
0003 : 5000H  
0005 : Clogged sensor used  
According to type  
02 Dirty state of filter  
0000 : Standard  
0001 : High degree of dirt  
(Half of standard time)  
0000 : Standard  
0099 : Unfixed  
03 Central control  
address  
0001 : No.1 unit  
0099 : Unfixed  
to  
to  
0064 : No.64 unit  
06 Heating suction temp 0000 : No shift  
0001 : +1°C  
0010 : -10°C  
0002 : +2°C  
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)  
shift  
0002 : +2°C  
(Up to recommendation + 6)  
0F Cooling only  
10 Type  
0000 : Heat pump  
0001 : Cooling only  
0000 : Shared for cooling/  
heating  
(No display of [AUTO] [HEAT])  
0000 : (Air discharge cassette 1) 0001 : (Air discharge cassette 4) to 0037  
According to model type  
According to capacity type  
0099 : Unfixed  
11 Indoor unit capacity 0000 : Unfixed  
0001 to 0034  
12 Line address  
0001 : No.1 unit  
0001 : No.1 unit  
to  
to  
0030 : No.30 unit  
0064 : No.64 unit  
0001 : Master of group  
13 Indoor unit address  
14 Group address  
0099 : Unfixed  
0000 : Individual  
0099 : Unfixed  
0002 : Sub of group  
19 Flap type  
(Adjustment of air  
direction)  
0000 : No flap  
0004 : 4-way  
0001 : Swing only  
According to type  
1E Temp difference of  
automatic cooling/  
heating mode  
0000 : 0 deg  
to  
0010 : 10 deg  
0003 : 3 deg  
(Ts 1.5)  
(For setup temperature, reversal of COOL/HEAT by (Data value)/2)  
selection COOL  
HEAT, HEAT COOL  
28 Automatic reset of  
power failure  
0000 : None  
0001 : Reset  
0000 : None  
2A Option  
0002 : Default  
2b Thermo output  
0000 : Indoor thermo ON  
0001 : Output of outdoor comp-ON  
receiving  
0000: Thermo. ON  
selection (T10  
)
ƒ
2E Option  
0000 : Default  
0000 : Default  
0000 : Default  
0000 : Body sensor  
0003 : Default  
0000 : Standard  
30 Option  
31 Option  
32 Sensor selection  
40 Option  
0000 : Body TA sensor  
0001 : Remote controller sensor  
5d High ceiling selection 0000 : Standard filter  
(Air volume selection) 0001 : Oil guard, Super-long life, Optical regenerative deodorization  
0003 : High performance (65%), High performance (90%),  
High antibacterial performance (65%)  
60 Timer set  
(Wired remote  
0000 : Available (Operable)  
0001 : Unavailable (Operation prohibited)  
0000 : Available  
0000 : None  
controller)  
8b Correction of high  
heat feeling  
0000 : None  
0001 : Correction  
94 –  
12-1-3. Cabling and Setting of Remote Controller Control  
2-remote controller control (Controlled by two remote controllers)  
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by two remote controllers.  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
Remote controller  
switch (Sub)  
Remote controller  
switch (Master)  
• 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2  
remote controllers  
Sold separately  
Sold separately  
Remote controller  
cables (Procured locally)  
Terminal block for  
remote controller cables  
A B  
Indoor unit  
1 2 3  
1 2 3  
Outdoor unit  
(Setup method)  
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by two remote controllers.  
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)  
Rear side of remote  
controller P.C. board  
<Wired remote controller>  
How to set wired remote controller to sub remote  
controller  
Remote controller  
address connector  
Insert the remote controller address connector  
provided on the rear side of the remote controller  
switch P.C. board into Sub in exchange for Master.  
Master remote  
controller  
Sub  
remote controller  
<Wireless remote controller>  
How to set wireless remote controller to sub  
remote controller  
S003  
Bit 1 : OFF to ON  
ON  
Change OFF of Bit [3: Remote controller Sub/  
Master] of switch S003 to ON.  
Sensor  
cover  
Sensor P.C. board  
Adjust  
corner cap  
[Operation]  
1. The operation contents can be changed by Last-push-priority.  
2. Use a timer on either Master remote controller or Sub remote controller.  
95 –  
12-1-4. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch  
n Call of sensor temperature display  
<Contents>  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
Each sensor temperature of the remote controller, indoor  
unit, and outdoor unit can become known by calling the  
service monitor mode from the remote controller.  
R.C. No.  
<Procedure>  
4
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4  
UNIT  
2
seconds or more to call the service monitor  
mode.  
SET CL  
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit  
No. is displayed, and then temperature of the item  
code 00 is displayed.  
1
3
<Operation procedure>  
2
Push the temperature setup  
to select the sensor No. (Item code) of the sensor  
to be monitored.  
/
buttons  
1 2 3 4  
The sensor numbers are described below:  
Returned to usual display  
Item code  
Data name  
Item code  
Data name  
Heat exchanger temp TE  
Outside temp TO  
Discharge temp TD  
Suction temp TS  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
00  
01  
Room temp (under control) *1  
Room temp (remote controller)  
Indoor  
unit data  
Outdoor  
unit data  
02  
03  
04  
Indoor suction temp  
Indoor coil temp (TCJ)  
Indoor coil temp (TC)  
Heat sink temp THS  
*1 Only master unit in group control  
3
4
The temperature of indoor units and outdoor unit in a group control can be monitored by pushing  
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.  
Pushing  
button returns the display to usual display.  
96 –  
n Calling of error history  
<Contents>  
The error contents in the past can be called.  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
<Procedure>  
R.C. No.  
1
Push  
+
buttons simultaneously for 4  
seconds or more to call the service check mode.  
Service Check goes on, the item code 01 is  
displayed, and then the content of the latest alarm is  
displayed.The number and error contents of the  
indoor unit in which an error occurred are displayed.  
3
UNIT  
2
SET CL  
2
3
In order to monitor another error history, push  
the set temperature  
/
buttons to  
1
change the error history No. (Item code).  
Item code 01 (Latest) Item code 04 (Old)  
NOTE : Four error histories are stored in memory.  
<Operation procedure>  
1 2 3  
Pushing  
display.  
button returns the display to usual  
Returned to usual display  
<Requirement>  
Do not push button, otherwise all the error histories of  
the indoor unit are deleted.  
(Group control operation)  
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.  
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to  
setting on the remote controller.  
<System example>  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
Master  
2-1  
1-1  
3-1  
4-1  
7-1  
Max. 8 units  
Remote controller  
(1) Display range on remote controller  
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the  
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.  
(2) Address setup  
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic  
address.  
If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address setting), the  
system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.  
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.  
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.  
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the  
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.  
97 –  
12-2. Network Adapter  
Model name:TCB-PCNT20E  
12-2-1. Function  
A network adapter is an optional P.C. board to connect the indoor unit to AI net (Central control remote controller).  
12-2-2. Microcomputer Block Diagram  
Central control  
Remote controller  
remote controller  
Indoor unit  
Optional communication P.C. board  
CN03  
AI-NET  
communication  
circuit  
CN41  
Indoor control  
P.C. board  
Remote  
CN02  
controller  
communication  
circuit  
MCU  
Terminal  
block  
(X.Y)  
CN309  
Terminal  
block  
(A.B)  
EEPROM  
CN01  
AC220-  
240V  
5V  
5V  
power  
supply  
Network  
Power  
transformer  
Network address  
setup switch  
AC14V  
Communication  
units: Total 64 units  
Communication  
distance: 1km  
12-2-3. Network Address Setup Switch (SW01)  
No.  
1
Item  
Setup contents  
LSB  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
2
×××××× : No.1 unit  
〇××××× : No.2 unit  
:
× : Switch OFF  
3
: Switch OFF  
Central control address  
MSB  
4
5
〇〇〇× : No.63 unit  
〇〇〇〇 : No.64 unit  
6
7
Switch OFF : Setup available from remote controller  
Switch ON : Setup unavailable from remote controller  
Setup availability from  
remote controller  
8
12-2-4. LED Display Specification  
LED No.  
Function  
Go on  
Go off  
D01 (Red) Communication status: Remote controller During communication No communication (including communication error)  
D02 (Red) Communication status: Center  
D03 (Red) Operation status of air conditioner  
D04 (Red) Air conditioner error  
During communication No communication (including communication error)  
Running  
Error  
Stop  
Normal  
* For positions of LED, refer to P.C. board external view.  
– 98 –  
12-2-5. Communication Cable Specifications  
No. Communication circuit  
Communication cable specifications  
Neutral 2-cable type  
1
Remote controller  
Cable  
communication side  
Cable type  
CVV (JIS C3401) Controlling vinyl insulation vinyl seal cable  
VCTF (JIS C3306) Vinyl cab tire round type cord  
VCT (JIS C3401) 600V vinyl cab tire cable  
VVR (JIS C3401) Vinyl insulation seal cable round type  
MVVS Cable with net shielding for instrumentation  
CPEVS Shielded polyethylene insulation vinyl seal cable  
Cable dia.  
0.5 to 2.0 mm²  
Cable length Total cable length Max. 500m  
(Up to 400m when there is wireless remote controller in group)  
2
AI NET side  
Cable  
Neutral 2-cable type  
Cable type  
Cable dia.  
MVVS Cable with net shielding for instrumentation  
1.25 mm² 500 m, 2.0 mm² 1 km  
Cable length Total cable length : Up to 500m when using 1.25mm² cable,  
Up to 1000m when using 2.0mm² cable  
12-2-6. Cable Connection  
<Network cable connection>  
• Install a network adapter per 1 group of the group control (including single unit control). Also install a network  
adapter to one of the indoor units in the group control.  
Central  
control  
remote  
Indoor unit  
Indoor unit  
Indoor  
unit  
Indoor  
unit  
Indoor  
unit  
Indoor  
unit  
controller  
X Y  
X Y  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Indoor  
control  
P.C. board  
Network  
adapter  
Network  
adapter  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
A B  
Remote  
controller  
Connectable indoor units per group: Up to 8 units  
(1-remote controller system*)  
* In case of 2-remote controllers system,  
the connectable indoor units are up to 7 units.  
– 99 –  
12-3. How to Set an Address Number  
When connecting indoor units to the central control remote controller by using a network adapter, it is required  
to set up a network address No.  
The network address No. should be agreed with the line No. of the central control remote controller.  
When the unit was shipped from the factory, the network address has been set to 1.  
The following two methods to set the network address are provided.  
1. How to set from the remote controller at indoor unit side  
* This method is effective only when  
of set switch SW01 on the network adapter P.C. board is turned off.  
<Procedure> Set the network address while the unit stops.  
Fig. 1  
1
Push  
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.  
In the group control, the unit No RLL is displayed,  
and then all the indoor units in the group control are  
selected. In this time, fans of all the selected indoor  
units are turned on. (Fig. 1)  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
R.C. No.  
(Keep status of RLL display without pushing  
button.)  
For the individual remote controller which is not  
included in a group control, the line address and the  
indoor unit address are displayed.  
3
5
1
UNIT  
2
SET CL  
2
3
Specify the item code 03 using the temperature  
setup  
/
buttons.  
4
Using the timer time  
setup data.  
/
buttons, select the  
Table 1  
The setup data are shown in the right table (Table 1).  
Setup data  
Network address No.  
SET  
4
5
Push  
button. (OK if display goes on)  
0001  
0002  
0003  
:
1
2
3
To change the item to be set, return to  
Push button.  
The status returns to the usual stop status.  
2
.
:
0064  
64  
0099  
Unset (Setup at shipment from factory)  
2. How to set by the switch on the network adapter P.C. board  
When the remote controller cannot be found or when you dont want to change setting of the network address  
No. from the remote controller, use the setup switch SW01 on the network adapter P.C. board (Network address  
No. setup switch) to set the address No.  
Invalid address No. setup from  
remote controller  
No. setup switch  
<Procedure>  
(1) Turn off the power.  
ON  
(2) Turn  
of the address No. setup switch SW01 to ON  
side. Accordingly the address No. set on the remote  
controller is invalidated. (See Fig. 2.)  
ON side  
OFF side  
(Numeral side)  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
(3) Set the network address No. with combination of ON  
and OFF of  
to  
of the address No. setup switch  

SW01  
Address No. setup  
SW01.The relation between combination of ON/OFF  
and address No. is described in Table 2.The right  
figure (Fig. 3) shows an example of case that the  
address No. is set to 16.  
Fig. 2  
Setup example of address No. 16  
ON  
ON side  
OFF side  
(Numeral side)  
When the network address No. has been changed,  
be sure to turn of power of the central control remote  
controller again or to reset the remote controller using  
the reset hole on the operation panel of the central  
control remote controller.  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
Fig. 3  
100 –  
Table 2 Network address No. setup table (SW01)  
: ON side  
×: OFF side  
Address No.  
01  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Address No.  
33  
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
02  
34  
03  
35  
04  
36  
05  
37  
06  
38  
07  
39  
08  
40  
09  
41  
10  
42  
11  
43  
12  
44  
13  
45  
14  
46  
15  
47  
16  
48  
17  
49  
18  
50  
19  
51  
20  
52  
21  
53  
22  
54  
23  
55  
24  
56  
25  
57  
26  
58  
27  
59  
28  
60  
29  
61  
30  
62  
31  
63  
32  
64  
Requirement in Service  
When using this product as service part to replace the network adapter P.C. board, be sure to match the setup  
of the setup switch SW01 (Network address No. setup switch) on the network adapter P.C. board with the P.C.  
board setup before replacement.  
101 –  
12-4. Display and Operation of Main Remote Controller and Central Control Remote  
Controller  
1. Turn on all the power supplies of the air conditioner, and then turn on power of the central control remote  
controller (Line 16 RBC-SXC1P, Line 64 TCB-SC641). If both power supplies are simultaneously turned on or  
if they are turned on reversely, the check code [97] may be temporarily displayed on the central remote  
controller. When settings of connecting cables and central control address are correct, the connected air  
conditioner is displayed on the central control remote controller.  
2. As shown in the following table, there is difference of LCD between main remote controller (RBC-AMT21)  
and the central control remote controller and also there are restriction and others of operation.  
Contents  
Item  
Cautions  
Main remote controller Central control remote controller  
1
Air volume selection [SPEED] [AUTO]  
[VOL]  
[AUTO]  
[H]  
[M]  
Display of air speed selection differs.  
[HH]  
[H]  
[L]  
[L]  
[SPEED]  
[HH]  
[VOL]  
[VOL]  
In duct type  
Air speed becomes [H] and [FIX].  
[FIX]  
2
3
Air speed selection  
in FAN mode  
[SPEED]  
[AUTO]  
[H]  
[M]  
When handling main remote controller, [AUTO] is  
not displayed. If [AUTO] is selected at center side,  
[AUTO] is displayed on the main remote controller.  
In this time, the air speed becomes [HH].  
[HH]  
[H]  
[L]  
[L]  
Air speed selection  
in DRY mode  
[SPEED] [AUTO]  
[VOL]  
[AUTO]  
On the central remote controller, only [AUTO] is  
displayed. The display on the main remote  
controller changes to [AUTO] by changing the  
setup temperature/louver, and the air speed is  
automatically selected.  
[HH]  
[H]  
[L]  
4
Air direction  
adjustment  
[SWING] and air  
direction adjustment  
[LOUVER]  
On the central remote controller, only [LOUVER] is  
displayed. It is displayed while flap is swinging,  
and the setup operation of [LOUVER] becomes  
selection of swing ON/OFF.  
To set up the air direction, use the main remote  
controller.  
(No display)  
Manual operation for  
[LOUVER]  
In a model type without air direction adjustment  
5
6
Check button  
Check code  
Test run (4 seconds)  
Check code display and  
check reset (3 seconds) check button differs. If the check reset operation  
on the central remote controller is performed  
The function of long-pushing operation for the  
during operation of air conditioner, the operation  
stops once, and then the operation restarts. (Error  
of air conditioner is cleared.)  
3-digits display (alpha-  
bet + 2-digits numeral)  
2-digits display (alpha-  
bet or numeral)  
Display of check code differs.  
Ex. : Float switch operation  
Main side: [P10]  
Center side: [0b]  
3. When using the remote controller together with the former one (RBC-AM1, AT1), the display on the main  
remote controller differs if [Last-push priority/Center/Operation Prohibited] is selected from the central control  
remote controller.  
Contents  
Item  
Remarks  
New remote controller  
(RBC-AMT21)  
Former remote controller  
(RBC-AM1, AT1)  
1
2
Last-push priority  
Center  
(No display)  
(No display)  
All the settings and ON/OFF operations are  
available.  
[CENTER] goes on  
[CENTER] goes on  
The setup contents on the central control remote  
controller are fixed, and only ON/OFF operation  
and timer setup operation are available on the  
main remote controller.  
3
Operation prohib-  
ited  
[CENTER] flashes  
The setup contents on the central control remote  
controller are fixed, and the air conditioner stops.  
Operation from the main remote controller is  
unavailable.  
102 –  
13. ADDRESS SETUP  
13-1. Address Setup  
<Address setup procedure>  
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor  
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address  
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while  
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)  
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,  
indoor unit address, and group address  
Completion of cabling work  
NO  
Do you arbitrarily set the  
indoor unit address?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
(MANUAL)  
Is refrigerant line 1 line?  
YES  
Is group control performed?  
YES  
(To AUTO address mode)  
Do you change setting after  
automatic setting at the first time?  
YES  
Connect one remote controller with  
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with  
communication cable.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
Turn on power of outdoor unit.  
After completion of address  
setup, change is to arbitral  
address/group manually.  
Setup of automatic  
address finishes within  
4 to 5 minutes.  
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.  
(
)
END  
When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC10) on the indoor P.C. board, a test run  
operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)  
Item code  
Data at shipment  
Setup data range  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0030 (No. 30 unit)  
Line address  
12  
13  
0099  
0099  
Indoor unit address  
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0030 (No. 30 unit)  
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line (Double twin = 4)  
Group address  
14  
0099  
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)  
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)  
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)  
103 –  
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control  
<Terminology>  
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)  
Group address : 0 = Individual (Not group control)  
1 = Master unit in group control  
2 = Sub unit in group control  
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from  
the remote controllers and sub indoor units. (* It has no relation with an indoor unit which  
communicates serially with the outdoor units.)  
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller  
LCD. (Except sir direction adjustment of flap)  
Sub unit (= 2)  
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation  
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.  
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)  
13-2-1. System configuration  
2. Single group operation  
1. Single  
Outdoor  
1-1  
Individual  
2-1  
Sub  
1-1  
Sub  
4-1  
Master  
3-1  
Sub  
8-1  
Sub  
Indoor  
(Master/Sub)  
Remote  
controller  
13-2-2. Automatic address example from unset address (No miscabling)  
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)  
1) Single  
2) Gr operation  
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial  
communication)  
1-1  
Individual  
2-1  
Sub  
1-1  
Sub  
4-1  
Master  
8-1  
Sub  
(Master/Sub)  
Max. 8 units  
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)  
104 –  
13-3. Address Setup  
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be determined prior to piping work after cabling work  
(Manual setting from remote controller)  
<Address setup procedure>  
Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.  
Turn on power supply.  
(Example of 2-lines cabling)  
SET  
1
2
Push  
+
+
buttons simultaneously  
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)  
for 4 seconds or more.  
OUT  
OUT  
(Line address) Using the temperature setup  
/
buttons, set 12 to the item code.  
3
4
5
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
(Indoor unit address) Using the temperature setup  
buttons, set 13 to the item code.  
/
IN  
IN  
6
7
8
Using timer time  
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.  
SET  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
2
1
2
Line address  
Indoor unit address  
Group address  
1
1
1
(Group address) Using the temperature setup  
buttons, set 14 to the item code.  
/
9
Using timer time  
buttons, set 0000 to Individual,  
0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.  
/
For the above example, perform setting by connecting  
singly the wired remote controller without remote  
controller inter-unit cable.  
SET  
10  
11  
Push  
button. (OK when display goes on.)  
Group address  
Individual : 0000  
Push  
button.  
Master unit : 0001  
In case of group control  
Setup completes.  
(The status returns to the usual stop status.)  
Sub unit  
: 0002  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
R.C. No.  
3, 6, 9  
END  
11  
UNIT  
2, 5, 8  
1
SET CL  
4, 7, 10  
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11  
105 –  
n Confirmation of indoor unit No. position  
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized  
In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)  
(Follow to the procedure during operation)  
<Procedure>  
CODE No.  
1
2
Push  
Push  
button if the unit stops.  
button.  
UNIT No.  
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.  
1
(It disappears after several seconds.)  
Operation  
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and  
indoor unit address.  
UNIT  
(When other indoor units are connected to the  
identical remote controller (Group control unit), other  
unit numbers are also displayed every pushing  
button.  
SET CL  
2
<Operation procedure>  
END  
1 2  
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address  
To confirm the unit No. in the group control  
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)  
<Procedure>  
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are succes-  
sively displayed, and fan, flap, and drain pump of the  
corresponding indoor unit are turned on. (Follow to the  
procedure during operation)  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
R.C. No.  
1
Push  
seconds or more.  
and  
buttons simultaneously for 4  
Unit No. ALL is displayed.  
1
Fans and flaps of all the indoor units in the group  
control operate.  
UNIT  
SET CL  
2
Every pushing  
the group control are successively displayed.  
button, the unit numbers in  
3
2
The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates the  
master unit address.  
<Operation procedure>  
Fan and flap of the selected indoor unit only  
operate.  
END  
1 2 3  
3
Push  
button to finish the procedure. All the  
indoor units in the group control stop.  
106 –  
RAV-SM800AT-E LED display when SW800 : Bit 1, 2, 3, 4 OFF  
When multiple errors are detected, the latest error is displayed.  
While LED displays (go on), there is the main cause of error in control at CDB side and it stops abnormally.  
While LED displays (flash), there is the main cause of error in control at IPDU side and it stops abnormally.  
For an error in case thermo operation, the communication is interrupted on the serial circuit. If continuing the  
case thermo operation, serial sending to the indoor unit is interrupted and a serial communication error is  
output.  
Table A  
Check code  
B type  
LED display  
No.  
Item  
D800  
(Red)  
D801  
D802  
D803  
(Yellow) (Yellow) (Yellow)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TE sensor error  
TD sensor error  
TS sensor error  
TO sensor error  
18  
19  
18  
1B  
1E  
1A  
Discharge temp error  
Out DC fan error  
CDB side  
Communication error between IPDU  
(Abnormal stop)  
7
8
1C  
21  
High-pressure release operation  
9
EEPROM error  
Communication error between IPDU  
(No abnormal stop)  
10  
11 G-Tr short-circuit protection  
12 Detection circuit error  
13 Current sensor error  
14 Phase missing detection  
15 Comp lock error  
14  
16  
17  
17  
1D  
1F  
IPDU side  
16 Comp breakdown  
: Go on, : Go off, : Flash (5 Hz)  
107 –  
14. TROUBLESHOOTING <WALLTYPE>  
14-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting  
<Wired remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+ and screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
 The following operations are normal.  
a) Compressor does not operate.  
Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
Does not thermostat turn off?  
Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
Is not detected an overflow error?  
Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
b) Indoor fan does not rotate.  
Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
c) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air speed changes.  
Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
Is not defrost operation performed?  
d) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
Is not during emergency operation?  
Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
ƒ Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble  
Confirmation of check code display  
Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE :  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer  
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the  
remote controller and the signal line to shield cables.  
108 –  
(a) Outline of Judgment  
A primary judgment to detect cause of error exists on the indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed in the  
following procedure.  
<Judgment by flashing display on the indoor unit display part>  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and if a protective circuit works, contents of  
the self-diagnosis are displayed with a block restricted to the following cases on the indoor unit display part.  
Remote  
controller code  
Block display  
Contents of self-diagnosis  
Check code  
00  
01  
02  
03  
Operation lamp display flashes. (1Hz)  
Operation lamp display flashes. (5Hz)  
Operation/timer lamp displays flash. (5Hz)  
Operation/defrost lamp displays flash. (5Hz)  
Power failure (In power ON)  
Indoor P.C. board  
——  
0b to 0F, 11, 12, b5, b6  
04  
Inter-unit cables/transmission system  
Outdoor P.C. board  
14 to 19, 1A, 1C  
1d, 1E, 1F, 21  
1b, 8b  
Operation/timer/defrost lamp displays flash. (5Hz) Cycle system, etc.  
—— ——  
(b) Self-diagnosis by check code on the remote controller  
Refer to Judgment of error mode by check code on the remote controller.  
<Wireless remote controller type>  
1. Before troubleshooting  
1) Required tools/instruments  
+ and screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.  
Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.  
2) Confirmation points before check  
 The following operations are normal.  
a) Compressor does not operate.  
Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?  
Does not thermostat turn off?  
Does not timer operate during fan operation?  
Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?  
b) Indoor fan does not rotate.  
Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?  
c) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.  
Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?  
Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?  
Is not defrost operation performed?  
d) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.  
Is not forced operation performed?  
Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?  
Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?  
ƒ Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?  
109 –  
2. Troubleshooting procedure  
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.  
Trouble  
Confirmation of check code by service mode  
Check defective position and parts.  
NOTE :  
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer  
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cable of the signal  
line to shield cable.  
(a) Outline of Judgment  
A primary judgment to detect cause of error exists on the indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed in the  
following procedure.  
<Judgment by flashing display on the indoor unit display part>  
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and if a protective circuit works, contents of  
the self-diagnosis are displayed with a block restricted to the following cases on the indoor unit display part  
(Sensors).  
Remote  
controller code  
Block display  
Contents of self-diagnosis  
Check code  
00  
01  
02  
03  
Operation lamp display flashes. (1Hz)  
Operation lamp display flashes. (5Hz)  
Operation/timer lamp displays flash. (5Hz)  
Operation/defrost lamp displays flash. (5Hz)  
Power failure (In power ON)  
Indoor P.C. board  
——  
0b to 0F, 11, 12, b5, b6  
04  
Inter-unit cables/transmission system  
Outdoor P.C. board  
14 to 19, 1A, 1C  
1d, 1E, 1F, 21  
1b, 8b  
Operation/timer/defrost lamp displays flash. (5Hz) Cycle system, etc.  
—— ——  
(b) Self-diagnosis by check code on the remote controller  
In the wireless type models, the self-diagnosis for the protective circuit operation is performed by handling  
the remote controller. First change the operation mode of the remote controller, and then perform the self-  
diagnosis by the displayed contents of the remote controller and the existence of operation lamp flashing  
(5Hz) and buzzer sound (Pi, Pi, Pi). During self-diagnosis operation, the timer lamp usually flashes (5Hz).  
 Selection of remote controller operation mode  
1) Selection of service mode  
Push the select button at lower side of the wireless remote controller with a tip of pencil, etc. for  
approx. 3 seconds or more. In this time, check that [00] is displayed on the room temp. display part  
and other displays go off.  
2) Selection of normal mode  
Push the reset button at lower side of the wireless remote controller with a tip of pencil, etc. In this  
time, check that [AM] display on the time display part flashes.  
Cautions in service  
1) After service work, be sure to push the reset button to return the mode to normal mode.  
2) After service by the check codes, turn off the power switch once and then turn on the switch to return  
the stored memory in microcomputer to the initial status.  
110 –  
(c) Self-diagnosis with remote controller  
With the indoor unit control, self-diagnosis of protective circuit action can be done by turning the remote  
controller operation into service mode, operating the remote controller, observing the remote controller  
indicators and checking whether TIMER lamp flashes (5 Hz).  
NOTE :  
To perform this self-diagnosis, the remote controller with the service code of 43069666 is required.  
<How to select remote control operation mode>  
1. Selecting service mode  
Push the switch button provided on rear bottom of the wireless remote control with a tip of pencil for more  
than 3 seconds. Make sure the setting temperature  
turned off.  
is displayed on the display and other display is  
2. Selecting ordinary mode  
Push the all clear button (ACL) on the rear bottom of the wireless remote controller with a tip of pencil for  
more than 3 seconds. Make sure the operation mode display, wind volume display, clock display and setting  
temperature display are turned on and : of the clock display is flashing.  
<Cautions when doing service>  
1. After completion of servicing, always push the all clear (ACL) button to return the operation mode to the  
normal mode.  
2. After completion of servicing by the check code, turn off the power once and then turn on the power to reset  
memorized contents of the microcomputer to the initial status.  
All clear button  
Switch for selecting  
service mode  
ACL  
CLOCK  
ACL CLOCK  
Rear bottom cover  
(Rear bottom of remote control)  
111 –  
<Self-diagnosis by check codes>  
1. The self-diagnosis by the check codes is conducted under the block displays.  
2. Remote controller key operation under the service mode is conducted by ON/OFF or TEMP.The remote  
controller display by each key operation is varied as shown below. Two digit number is displayed in a hexa-  
decimal number.  
3. The self-diagnosis by the check codes is conducted with procedures shown below.  
.
1) Enter the service mode and make sure the off timer display of the remote controller shows  
2) Operate the ON/OFFkey and make sure the timer lamp on the display section is flashing (5 Hz).  
3) At the same time, also make sure the operation lamp is also flashing. This shows that the protection  
circuit on the indoor P.C. board is working.  
4) Operate the TEMP.  
key and make sure the remote controller display shows  
and flashing of the  
operation lamp. If the operation lamp is flashing, it shows the protection circuits for connecting cable is  
working or thermal fuse is blown.  
5) In the same way, operate the TEMP.  
key so that the display is increased one by one to continue checks  
by the self-diagnosis as shown in the next table. From  
up to  
check operations of protection  
circuits for each block, and  
to  
check operations of the typical protection circuits.  
Operating key  
Indication after operation  
ON/OFF  
TEMP.  
1 is added to data before operation.  
(Up)  
(Example)  
1 is subtracted from data before operation.  
(Example)  
TEMP.  
(Down)  
10 is subtracted from data before operation.  
(Example)  
AUTOLOUVER  
Data before operation is directly transferred.  
(Example)  
SETLOUVER  
112 –  
14-2. Troubleshooting with CHECK Display of Remote Controller  
14-2-1. In case of main remote controller/sub-remote controller A  
RBC-AM1E  
RBC-AS1E  
1. Operation for CHECK display  
When pushing the CHECK switch, the indoor unit No. (Group address No.) which sends the check code is  
displayed at the right side of the set up TEMP. display section, and the check data of 2 errors/faults x 16 units  
is displayed in the set up temp. display section.  
If there is a filter display, the indoor unit No. which sends the filter signal is displayed at the right side of the  
set up temp. display section, and then the check code is displayed as described above.  
(1 display for 3 seconds)  
LCD display “STANDBY”  
is present.  
MODE FAN TEMP.  
• When phase-sequence of power  
wiring is incorrect  
F A N  
CHECK A D D R E S S UNIT STANDBY  
C O O L 1 2  
FILTER  
PREHEAT  
DEFROST  
• When combination of indoor units  
is over capacity  
H E AT AU TO  
LOUVER  
FIX  
CENTRAL MANUAL  
• Indoor unit with command  
excepted by operation mode  
select switch  
MODE  
• When there is an indoor unit  
which stopped with the indoor  
overflow alarm “0b”.  
FILTER CHECK  
• Indoor unit with cooling operation  
command excepted by heating  
priority control  
ON/OFF  
RESET switch  
Push the switch in the hole with pin.  
The remote controller resets the power supply.  
(All data is cleared.)  
CHECK switch  
Push for 0.5 seconds to display CHECK code.  
Push for 3 seconds to reset indoor microprocessor.  
(While indoor microprocessor is locked by ALL STOP alarm)  
Push for 10 seconds to clear check data.  
113 –  
2. Reading of CHECK monitor display  
<7 segment display>  
Hexadecimal  
notation  
Decimal notation  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
<Display on CHECK monitor>  
CHECK  
1 2  
UNIT  
FILTER sign  
Indoor unit No.  
FILTER  
CHECK code  
<FILTER data>  
(Example) Case that Filter signal is sent from No.1 and No.16 units under group operation  
UNIT  
UNIT  
FILTER  
FILTER  
<CHECK data>  
(Example) Room temp.sensor of No.1 is defective.  
In No.16, first the heat exchanger sensor has failed.  
Next, interconnection wire (serial signal line) of indoor/outdoor is defective.  
CHECK  
1
UNIT  
CHECK  
1
UNIT  
CHECK  
2
UNIT  
(Example) There is no check data.  
CHECK  
114 –  
14-2-2. Remote controller with timer  
RBC-AM1E  
1. Operation for CHECK display  
When pushing the CHECK switch, the indoor unit No. (Group address No.) which sends the check code is  
displayed in the set up temp. display section, and check code is displayed in the TIME display section.  
If FILTER display (air filter cleaning sign) is present, the indoor unit No. which sends the filter signal is dis-  
played in the set up temp. display section, and then the check code is displayed. (1 display for 3 seconds)  
LCD display STANDBY is present.  
• When phase-sequence of power wiring is incorrect  
• When combination of indoor units is over capacity.  
• Indoor unit with command excepted by operation mode select switch  
• When there is an indoor unit which stopped with the indoor overflow alarm “0b”.  
• Indoor unit with cooling operation command excepted by heating priority control  
REMOTE CONTROLLER  
MODE FAN  
FAN ONLY AUTO  
PREHEAT  
DEFROST  
OPERATION  
STANDBY  
FILTER  
COOL  
HIGH  
MED  
LOW  
FIX  
MODE  
HEAT  
TEMP CHECK LOUVER  
UNIT DEMAND MANUAL  
C
F
TIMER ADJUST  
FILTER  
CONT.OFF ON ADDRESS  
TIMER  
CHECK  
AFTER  
H
M
ON/OFF  
(This display is for remote control with timer.)  
CHECK switch  
RESET switch  
Push for 0.5 seconds to display CHECK code.  
Push the switch in  
the hole with pin.  
The remote controller  
resets initialized.  
Push for 3 seconds to reset indoor microprocessor.  
(While indoor microprocessor is locked by ALL STOP alarm)  
Push for 10 seconds to clear check data.  
(All data is cleared.)  
115 –  
2. Reading of CHECK monitor display  
<7 segment display>  
Hexadecimal  
notation  
Decimal notation  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
<FILTER data>  
(Example) Filter signal is sent from No.1 and No.15 units under grouping operation  
FILTER  
FILTER  
CHECK  
CHECK  
UNIT  
UNIT  
<CHECK data>  
CHECK  
Unit No.  
UNIT  
Check code detected at first  
Check code detected at last  
(Example) Room temp.sensor of No.1 is defective.  
In No.15, first the indoor heat exchanger sensor has failed.  
Next, interconnection wire (bus communication line) of  
indoor/outdoor is defective.  
(Example) There is no check  
data.  
CHECK  
CHECK  
CHECK  
UNIT  
UNIT  
After 3  
seconds  
116 –  
14-2-3. Central remote controller  
1. Operation for CHECK display  
When pushing the CHECK switch, the indoor unit No. (Network address No.) including the check data is  
displayed in the UNIT No. display section, and the check code is displayed in the set up temp. display sec-  
tion.  
CHECK switch  
ON  
MONITOR ZONE  
SET ALL  
ON  
CENTER AUX.TYPE  
STANDBY  
FILTER  
Push for 0.5 seconds to display CHECK code.  
Push for 3 seconds to reset indoor microprocessor.  
(While indoor microprocessor is locked by ALL STOP alarm)  
UNIT  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
OFF LOCKED TIMER No.  
MODE FAN TEMP. CHECK  
FAN ONLY AUTO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
C
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
COOL HIGH  
DRY MED.  
HEAT LOW  
AUTO FIX  
LOUVER  
MANUAL  
Push for 10 seconds to clear check data.  
MONITOR/SET ALL/ZONE  
ZONE SET/ENTER SELECT  
ZONE  
UNIT  
ON  
CENTER/LOCKED  
FILTER RESET CHECK  
LOUVER  
MODE TEMP.  
OFF  
TIMER ON FAN  
RESET switch  
Push the switch in the hole with pin.  
The remote controller resets initialized.  
(All data is cleared.)  
2. Reading of CHECK monitor display  
<7 segment display>  
Hexadecimal  
notation  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
Decimal notation  
<Display on CHECK monitor>  
Unit line No. (Network address No.)  
MONITOR ZONE  
SET ALL  
ON  
CENTER AUX.TYPE  
STANDBY  
FILTER  
UNIT  
OFF LOCKED TIMER No.  
MODE FAN TEMP. CHECK  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48  
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64  
FAN ONLY AUTO  
COOL HIGH  
DRY MED.  
HEAT LOW  
AUTO FIX  
1
2
C
LOUVER  
MANUAL  
(Example)  
There is no check data.  
Check code detected at first  
Check code detected at last  
UNIT  
TEMP. CHECK  
<CHECK data>  
(Example)  
In No.1 unit, first the interconnection wire (bus communication line) of indoor/outdoor has failed.  
Next, the room temp. sensor is defective.  
For No.16 unit, the high pressure switch at the inverter unit side operates.  
UNIT  
UNIT  
UNIT  
TEMP. CHECK  
1
TEMP. CHECK  
2
TEMP. CHECK  
1
117 –  
14-3. Check CodeTable  
Error mode detected by indoor unit (1)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Block  
display  
Check  
code  
Status of air  
conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
[MODE]  
[TIMER] lamp  
5Hz flash  
The serial signal is not output  
from outdoor unit to indoor unit. continues  
Operation  
Displayed when 1. Outdoor unit does not completely  
error is detected  
operate.  
Miscabling of inter-unit cables  
Inter-unit cable check, correction of  
miscabling  
Defective serial sending  
circuit on outdoor P.C. board  
Outdoor P.C. board check, P.C. board  
cables check  
Defective serial receiving  
circuit on outdoor P.C. board  
Compressor case thermo check  
Compressor case thermo  
2. In normal operation  
operation  
When outdoor sending serial LED  
(Green) flashes, the receiving serial  
LED (Orange) also flashes. : Indoor  
P.C. board (Main P.C. board) check  
When the receiving serial LED  
(Orange) does not flash: Outdoor P.C.  
board check  
BUS communication circuit error Operation  
Displayed when 1. Communication line check, miscabling  
continues  
(According  
to remote  
error is detected  
check  
* BUS communication was  
interrupted over the specified  
time.  
Power supply check for central  
controller (Central control remote  
controller, etc.) and indoor unit  
controller of  
indoor unit)  
2. Communication check (XY terminal)  
3. Indoor P.C. board check  
4. Central controller check  
(Communication P.C. board)  
Network address miss-setting  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check central control system network  
error is detected  
address setting. (SW02)  
Addresses of central  
controllers (Central control  
remote controller, etc.) are  
duplicated.  
2. Indoor P.C. board check  
3. Central controller check  
(Communication P.C. board)  
Error in 4-way valve system  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check 4-way valve.  
error is detected  
Indoor heat exchanger  
temperature rise after start of  
cooling operation.  
2. Check 2-way valve and non-return  
valve.  
3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor  
(TC).  
Indoor heat exchanger  
temperature fall after start of  
heating operation.  
4. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
Error in other cycles  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Compressor case thermo operation  
error is detected  
Indoor heat exchanger temp  
(TC) does not vary after start  
of cooling/heating operation.  
2. Coming-off of detection part of indoor  
heat exchanger sensor  
3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor  
(TC).  
*
4. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
[MODE] lamp  
5Hz flash  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of indoor temp sensor  
(TA)  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor temp sensor (TA).  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of indoor temp sensor  
(TC)  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor temp sensor (TC).  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of indoor temp sensor  
(TCJ)  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor temp sensor (TCJ).  
error is detected  
2. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
: No display in the setting at shipment  
*
118 –  
Error mode detected by indoor unit (1)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Block  
display  
Check  
code  
Status of air  
conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
[MODE] lamp  
5Hz flash  
Error in indoor fan system  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor fan motor connector  
error is detected  
circuit (CN210).  
Revolutions frequency error of  
fan  
2. Check indoor fan.  
3. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
Error in indoor unit or other  
positions  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check indoor P.C. board  
error is detected (EEPROM and peripheral circuits)  
(Main P.C. board).  
1. EEPROM access error  
Outside error input  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.  
error is detected  
Detected by input voltage level  
from outside devices  
2. Check indoor P.C. board (Main P.C.  
board).  
Outside interlock input  
All stop  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
Detected by input voltage level  
from outside devices  
Error mode detected by indoor unit (2)  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Check  
code  
Status of air  
conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
Serial return signal is not sent ON/OFF  
from No. 1 indoor unit to  
remote controller.  
Displayed when 1. Indoor unit does not completely operate.  
error is detected  
Check inter-unit cable.  
Check indoor P.C. board. (Main/Sub P.C. boards)  
Check remote controller.  
Miscabling of inter-unit cable  
between remote controller  
and indoor unit  
2. In normal operation  
Miss-setting of indoor unit No.  
(Group address)  
Check setting of indoor unit No.  
(SW01) (Sub P.C. board)  
Check remote controller.  
119 –  
Error mode detected by outdoor unit  
Operation of diagnostic function  
Judgment and measures  
Check  
code  
Status of air  
conditioner  
Cause of operation  
Condition  
Inverter over-current protective All stop  
circuit operates.  
(For a short time)  
Displayed when 1. Inverter immediately stops even if restarted.  
error is detected  
Compressor rare short  
2. Check IPDU.  
Cabling error  
Error on current detection  
circuit  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Compressor immediately stops even if restarted.  
error is detected  
: Check IPDU.  
Current value is high at AC  
side even while compressor  
stops.  
2. Phase-missing operation of power supply  
Check power voltage of R, S, T.  
Phase of power supply is  
missed.  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of outdoor temp sensor  
All stop  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temp sensor (TE, TS).  
error is detected  
2. Check CDB.  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of outdoor temp sensor  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temp sensor (TD).  
error is detected  
2. Check CDB.  
Compressor drive output error All stop  
Tin thermistor temp, Tin error  
Displayed when 1. Abnormal overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
error is detected  
2. Loosening of screws and contact error of IPDU and  
heat sink  
(IPDU heat sink temp. is high.)  
3. Cooling error of heat sink  
4. Check cabling of CDB and IPDU.  
Communication error between  
IPDU  
Connector coming-off  
between CDB and IPDU  
Compressor does not rotate.  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Compressor error (Compressor lock, etc.)  
error is detected  
: Replace compressor.  
(Over-current protective circuit  
works when constant time  
passed after activation of  
compressor.)  
2. Cabling trouble of compressor (Phase missing)  
Discharge temp error  
All stop  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Check refrigerating cycle. (Gas leak)  
error is detected  
Discharge temp over  
specified value was detected.  
2. Error of electron control valve  
3. Check pipe sensor (TD).  
Compressor breakdown  
Displayed when 1. Check power voltage. (AC200V 20V)  
error is detected  
Operation frequency lowered  
and stops though operation  
had started.  
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
3. Check current detection circuit at AC side.  
High-voltage protection error  
by TE sensor  
All stop  
All stop  
Displayed when  
error is detected  
1. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle  
2. Check outdoor temp sensor (TE).  
TE temp over specified value  
was detected.  
DC outdoor fan motor error  
Displayed when 1. Position detection error  
error is detected  
IDC operation or lock was  
detected by DC outdoor fan  
driving.  
2. Over-current protection circuit operation of outdoor fan  
drive unit  
Check CDB.  
Refer to Judgment of outdoor fan.  
Error on IPDU position  
detection circuit  
All stop  
Displayed when 1. Position detection circuit operates even if driving by  
error is detected  
removing 3P connector of compressor.  
Replace IPDU.  
Coming-off, disconnection or  
short of outdoor temp sensor  
Operation  
continues  
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor temp sensor (TO).  
error is detected  
2. Check P.C. board.  
120 –  
14-4. Troubleshooting for Each Check Code  
[1A error]  
Are connections of CN301 and  
CN300 of CDB correct?  
YES  
Does the fan rotate without trouble  
NO  
when handling the fan with hands under condition  
of removing CN301 and CN300 from CDB?  
CN301  
YES  
The status that the resistance values  
between leads below are 50 to 80  
for 40W motor (ICF-140-43) and 25 to 55  
NO  
for 60W motor (ICF-140-63-1) is normal.  
1
2
Between  
Between  
Between  
(Red lead) and  
(White lead)  
(Black lead)  
2
3
(White lead) and  
(Black lead) and  
(Red lead)  
3
1
CN300  
of motor winding of connector (CN301)  
YES  
For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN300 changes to  
CN301, and CN301 to CN300, respectively.  
The status that there is  
NO  
5k to 20k resistance values between  
1
(Yellow lead) and  
4
(Pink lead)  
of motor position detection of connector  
(CN300, CN302) is normal.  
YES  
Defective fan motor  
Normal fan motor  
(CDB error)  
NOTE :  
However, GND circuit error inside of the motor is rarely detected even if the above check is carried out.  
When the circuit does not become normal even if P.C. board has been replaced, replace outdoor fan motor.  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
Control P.C. board  
CN300  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
CDB P.C. board  
CN301  
Objective P.C. board  
Fan motor winding  
Motor position detection  
CN301  
CN300  
121 –  
[04 error]  
NO  
Does outdoor unit operate?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Are 1, 2, 3 inter-unit  
cables normal?  
Correct inter-unit cable.  
YES  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
Are connections of  
connectors normal?  
YES  
Is DC310 to 340V  
NO  
applied between terminals  
of electrolytic capacitor  
of IPDU main circuit?  
Replace IPDU.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
replace control P.C. board.  
YES  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
check case thermo.  
Is DC310 to 340V  
power supplied to CDB?  
(CN03)  
NO  
Replace IPDU.  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection  
of connector.  
Is case thermo  
(CN500) connected?  
YES  
Check CDB.  
Does case thermo operate?  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
replace control P.C. board.  
NO  
Does LED (D05) (Orange)  
on indoor main P.C. board flash?  
YES  
Check CDB.  
Defect Replace  
Check/Correct charged  
refrigerant amount.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
replace control P.C. board.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
replace control P.C. board.  
Check main indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
Defect Replace  
122 –  
[08 error]  
Is 200V applied to  
4-way valve coil terminal  
in heating operation?  
NO  
YES  
Is operation of  
4-way valve normal?  
YES  
NO  
Is flow of refrigerant by  
2-way valve, check valve,  
or electron expansion  
valve normal?  
NO  
Check 4-way valve.  
YES  
Check and replace  
2-way valve, check  
valve, or electron  
expansion valve.  
NO  
Is circuit cable normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit.  
Are characteristics  
of TC sensor resistance  
value normal?  
NO  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
check control P.C. board.  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
NO  
Check CDB P.C. board.  
YES  
Replace TC sensor.  
Check indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A) and  
sub P.C. board (MCC-1370B).  
Defect Replace  
Check CDB P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
replace control P.C. board.  
In cooling operation, if high pressure is abnormally raised, [08 error] may be displayed. In this case, remove  
cause of pressure up and then check again referring to the item [21 error].  
[0C error]  
NO  
Is connection of TA sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
(Indoor main P.C. board CN04) normal?  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TA sensor resistance value normal?  
Replace TA sensor.  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-1.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
Defect  
Replace  
123 –  
[0d error]  
NO  
Is connection of TC sensor connector  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TC sensor.  
(Indoor P.C. board CN05) normal?  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TC sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
Defect  
Replace  
[0F error]  
NO  
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector  
(Indoor P.C. board CN20) normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Replace TCJ sensor.  
YES  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-2.  
Check indoor P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
Defect  
Replace  
124 –  
[99 error]  
NO  
Is inter-unit cable of  
A, B and C normal?  
Correct inter-unit cable  
of remote controller.  
YES  
YES  
Is there no disconnection or  
contact error of connector?  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check circuit cables.  
NO  
YES  
Is individual (1 : 1) operation?  
NO  
NO  
Is unit set to No.1?  
YES  
Set the unit to No.1.  
NO  
Are not No.1 unit  
duplicated?  
YES  
NO  
Does indoor unit operate?  
YES  
Does LED (Green)  
on indoor main P.C. board flash?  
(D13)  
YES  
NO  
Check indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
Avoid duplication of  
unit No.1 setting.  
Check remote controller P.C. board.  
Defect Replace  
Defect  
Replace  
125 –  
[11 error]  
Turn off the breaker once.  
Turn on the breaker  
after approx. 10 seconds.  
NO  
Does fan stop when  
operation stopped?  
YES  
NO  
Is DC1V or more voltage applied  
+
Replace indoor fan motor.  
between 5  
and 3  
of the  
motor connector (CN210)?  
YES  
Start the operation with  
cooling mode [L (Low)].  
NO  
Does the fan rotate?  
YES  
Replace indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
NO  
NO  
Is DC280V or more voltage applied  
+
between 1  
and 3  
of the  
motor connector (CN210)?  
YES  
(Connection status of motor)  
Is DC15V or more voltage applied  
+
between 4  
and 3  
of the  
motor connector (CN210)?  
YES  
Stop the operation and turn off the breaker.  
After removing motor connector,  
turn on the breaker again and then stop  
the operation from remote controller.  
Change the cooling  
mode to [H (High)].  
NO  
Is DC15V voltage applied  
Replace indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
+
between 4  
and 3  
of the  
motor connector (CN210)?  
YES  
Is DC1V or more voltage applied  
+
between 5  
and 3  
of the  
NO  
motor connector (CN210) when changing  
the operation mode (except HEAT)?  
(Check within approx. 15 seconds  
after operation has started.)  
YES  
Stop the operation and disconnect the  
receptacle. After removing motor connector,  
connect receptacle again and then stop  
the operation from remote controller.  
NO  
Is fan speed raised?  
YES  
Is DC1V or more voltage applied  
+
between 5  
and 3 of the  
YES  
motor connector (CN210) when changing  
the operation mode (except HEAT)?  
(Check within approx. 15 seconds  
after operation has started.)  
Replace indoor fan motor.  
Normal fan motor  
NO  
NO  
Does the cross flow fan rotate normally  
when handled with hands?  
YES  
Does 0 to 5V voltage  
(revolutions return signal) generate  
Replace indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A).  
NO  
+
between 6  
and 3  
of the  
motor connector (CN210) when rotating  
the cross flow fan with hands under  
condition of operation-stop?  
YES  
Repair bering of the cross flow fan  
.
Replace indoor fan motor.  
126 –  
[11 error]  
Indoor fan starts rotating by inserting receptacle.  
P.C. board  
CN210  
[Check output voltage (DC) of P.C. board fan motor.]  
6 (Blue)  
5 (Yellow)  
4 (White)  
3 (Black)  
Yellow  
Black  
Measure the voltages of the motor connector  
CN210 Pin 3 (GND (minus): Black) and Pin 5 (V line (plus): Yellow)  
under condition that indoor fan rotates.  
2
1 (Red)  
DC1.0V or more  
DC1.0V or less  
DC  
Defective  
indoor main P.C. board  
(MCC-1370A)  
Defective indoor fan motor  
[12 error]  
NO  
Check power voltage. Improve line.  
Check and eliminate noise, etc.  
Is there no turbulence of power supply?  
YES  
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1370A).  
Defect  
Replace  
– 127 –  
[14 error]  
NO  
NO  
Improve the power supply line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit cables.  
Correct connection of connector.  
Check and correct reactor connection.  
Are connections of  
cabling/connector normal?  
YES  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E,  
check RY01 on the control P.C. board.  
Is not 14errors output  
YES  
NO  
Does RY01 relay of  
IPDU operate?  
when an operation is performed by  
removing 3P connector of compressor?  
NO  
YES  
* Single-phase type is not  
provided to RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Replace IPDU.  
YES  
Is not AC fuse fused?  
NO  
* Replace control P.C. board  
of RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Replace IPDU.  
NO  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
* Replace control P.C. board  
of RAV-SM560AT-E.  
Check IPDU.  
Defect Replace  
Check rare short of compressor trouble.  
Defect Replace  
[16 error]  
NO  
NO  
Check and correct circuit cabling  
such as cabling to compressor.  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
YES  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Compressor error  
Replace  
Replace  
Replace  
Is not earthed?  
NO  
YES  
Is not winding shorted?  
(Is resistance between windings 0.6 to 1.2 ?)  
NO  
YES  
Is not winding opened?  
NO  
Check IPDU P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
128 –  
[18 error]  
Are connections of  
TE/TS sensor connectors of  
CDB CN604/CN605 normal?  
NO  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
* (For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN600 TE sensor and CN603 TS sensor)  
NO  
Are characteristics of TE/TS sensor  
resistance values normal?  
Replace TE and TS sensors.  
* Refer to Characteristics-3.  
YES  
Check CDB.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, replace the control P.C. board  
Defect  
Replace  
[19 error]  
NO  
Is connection of TD sensor connector  
of CDB CN600 normal?  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, CN601 on control P.C. board  
NO  
Are characteristics of TD sensor  
resistance value normal?  
Replace TD sensor.  
YES  
Check control P.C. board.  
* Refer to Characteristics-4.  
Defect  
Replace  
[1C error] * Except RAV-SM560AT-E  
Are connections of  
CDB CN800 and CDB IPDU CN06  
connectors normal?  
NO  
Correct connection of connector.  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Check cabling between IPDU  
and CDB and connector.  
Was the error just after  
power ON determined?  
Are cabling/connector normal?  
YES  
NO  
IPDU P.C. board error  
Defect  
Replace  
YES  
NO  
Improve and eliminate the cause.  
Is there no abnormal overload?  
NO  
Is IPDU P.C. board come to  
closely contact with heat sink?  
Correct mounting.  
YES  
IPDU P.C. board error  
Defect  
Replace  
129 –  
[1d error]  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Improve power line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
Check and correct circuit cabling such  
as cabling to compressor  
(phase missing) and connector.  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Is there no  
Compressor lock  
Replace  
Is compressor normal?  
YES  
slackened refrigerant?  
YES  
Check TE and TS sensors. Replace  
Check electron expansion valve. Replace  
Does electron expansion  
valve normally operate?  
YES  
Check IPDU and CDB.  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, check control P.C. board.  
Defect  
Replace  
Defect  
Replace  
[1E error]  
NO  
NO  
Correct the cabling and  
connection of connector.  
Is protective control such as  
discharge temprelease control normal?  
Are connections of  
cable/connector normal?  
YES  
YES  
Check parts. Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Check and correct the charged  
refrigerant amount.  
Is charged refrigerant amount normal?  
YES  
YES  
Improve and delete the cause  
Is not abnormal overload?  
NO  
NO  
Are characteristics of  
Replace TD sensor.  
Check CDB.  
TD sensor resistance value normal?  
* Refer to Characteristics-4.  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, check control P.C. board.  
[1F error]  
NO  
Improve power line.  
Is power voltage normal?  
YES  
YES  
Improve and delete the cause.  
Is not abnormal overload?  
NO  
NO  
Is the circuit detected by  
current sensor normal?  
Check and correct circuit cables.  
Check IPDU.  
YES  
Defect  
Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, check control P.C. board.  
130 –  
[21 error] [  
] LCD flash  
Is high-voltage  
protective operation by  
TE sensor normal?  
NO  
YES  
NO  
Correct connection of  
cabling connector.  
Is connection of cabling  
connector normal?  
YES  
Check TE sensor.  
Defect  
Replace  
NO  
Does cooling outdoor fan  
normally operate?  
YES  
NO  
NO  
Correct connection of  
connector.  
Is connection of  
connector normal?  
YES  
Replace fan motor.  
Is fan motor normal?  
YES  
NO  
Does electron control  
valve normally operate?  
YES  
YES  
NO  
Do not TD and TO sensors  
come off the detection part?  
Correct coming-off.  
NO  
Check TE, TC, TS sensors.  
Replace electron expansion valve.  
Are characteristics of  
TD, TO, TC sensor resistance  
values normal?  
Replace TD, TO,  
and TC sensors.  
YES  
* Refer to Characteristics-3 and 4.  
Check charged refrigerant amount.  
Check liquid/gas valves.  
Check abnormal overload.  
Check CDB.  
Defect Replace  
* For RAV-SM560AT-E, check control P.C. board.  
131 –  
14-5. Simple Check Method for Main Parts  
14-5-1. Indoor unit  
No.  
Part name  
Check procedure  
1
Temperature sensor (Ta)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Tc) (Normal temperature)  
Heat exchanger sensor (Tcj)  
Measure the resistance value with tester by removing the connector.  
Normal value  
10 kto 20 kΩ  
Refer to Characteristics table.  
2
Louver motor  
MP35EA12  
Measure the resistance value of each winding coil with tester.  
(Under normal temperature 25°C)  
Position  
Resistance value  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Brown  
Red  
Orange  
Yellow  
Pink  
Between 1 and 2  
Between 1 and 3  
Between 1 and 4  
Between 1 and 5  
130 40  
Blue  
3
Indoor fan motor  
(ICF-340-30-1)  
lMeasure the resistance value of each winding coil with tester.  
lFor P.C. board side, proceed to [11 error] of Troubleshooting procedure for each  
check code.  
Position  
Resistance value  
(M)  
27 to 47 kΩ  
140 to 280 kΩ  
(M)  
Between  
Between  
Between  
Between  
(Black) and  
(Black) and  
(Black) and  
(Black) and  
(Red)  
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ
ƒ

(White)  
(Yellow)  
(Blue)  
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Red  
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
Black  
White  
Yellow  
Blue  
132 –  
Relational graph of temperature sensor resistance value and temperature  
20  
40  
30  
TA sensor  
TC,TCJ sensor  
Caracteristics-2  
Caracteristics-1  
Resistance  
(k )  
Resistance  
(k )  
20  
10  
10  
0
0
10 20 30  
40 50  
10  
0
10 20  
30 40 50 60 70  
Temperature [ C]  
Temperature [ C]  
TE, TO, TS sensor  
20  
200  
Caracteristics-3  
Resistance  
Resistance  
(k )  
(k )  
(10 C or higher)  
10  
(10 C or lower)  
100  
0
0
-10  
0
10 20 30  
40 50 60 70  
Temperature [ C]  
TD sensor  
20  
200  
Caracteristics-4  
Resistance  
Resistance  
(k )  
(50 C or lower)  
(k )  
(50 C or higher)  
10  
100  
0
0
50  
100  
Temperature [ C]  
133 –  
Resistance  
(K )  
(10 C or higher)  
Resistance  
(K )  
200  
20  
15  
10  
5
TH sensor  
Caracteristics-5  
150  
100  
50  
30  
20  
10  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
50  
60  
70  
80  
90  
100  
Temperature [ºC]  
134 –  
15. DETACHMENTS  
15-1. Indoor Unit  
RAV-SM560UT-E, SM800UT-E  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
 Suction grille  
REQUIREMENT  
Never forget to put on the gloves at  
disassembling work, otherwise an injury  
will be caused.  
Knob of suction grille  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner,  
and then turn off switch of the breaker.  
2) Hang down the suction grille while  
sliding two knobs of the suction grille  
inward.  
3) Remove a strap connecting the panel  
and the suction grille to remove the  
suction grille.  
Remove the strap.  
2. Attachment  
1) Hang the suction grille to the panel.  
2) Attach the strap of the suction grille to  
the panel as before.  
3) Close the suction grille, slide the knobs  
outward, and then fix it.  
Electric parts  
1. Detachment  
cover  
1) Perform work of item 1. of .  
2) Remove screws fixing the electric parts  
cover. (Ø4 x 10, 3 pcs.)  
3) Remove the electric parts cover from  
the tentative hook, and then open the  
cover.  
3 screws  
2. Attachment  
1) Close the electric parts cover and hang  
the cover hole to the tentative hook.  
2) Tighten the fixing screws.  
(Ø4 x 10, 3 pcs.)  
Tentative hook  
– 135 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
ƒ Adjust corner  
1. Detachment  
cap  
1) Perform work of item 1. of .  
2) Remove screws at 4 corners of the  
suction port. (Ø4 x 10, 4 pcs.)  
3) Push the knob outward and remove the  
adjust corner cap by sliding it.  
Screw  
2. Attachment  
1) Mount the adjust corner cap by sliding  
it inward.  
2) Tighten screws at 4 corners of the  
suction port. (Ø4 x 10, 4 pcs.)  
Push outward  
Ceiling panel  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform works of items 1 of , 1 of ‚  
and 1 of ƒ.  
2) Remove the flap connector (CN33,  
White, 5P) connected to the control P.C.  
board, and then remove the lead wire  
from the clamp.  
Remove the flap  
connector  
NOTE :  
Remove the connector by releasing  
locking of the housing.  
3) Remove screws fixing the ceiling panel.  
(M5, 4 pcs.)  
Fixing screw  
4) Push the tentative hook outward to  
remove the ceiling panel.  
2. Attachment  
1) Hang the tentative hook of the main  
body drain pan to the tentative hook of  
the ceiling panel.  
NOTE :  
A panel has directional property, so mount  
a panel with attention to the marks.  
Push the tentative  
hook outward  
2) Tighten fixing screws. (M5, 4 pcs.)  
3) Connect flap connector of the ceiling  
panel to connector (CN33, White, 5P)  
on the control P.C. board.  
– 136 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Control P.C.  
1. Detachment  
board  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and 1 of  
.  
2) Remove connectors which are con-  
nected from the control P.C. board to  
other parts.  
CN33 : Flap motor (5P: White)  
CN34 : Float switch (3P: Red)  
Card-edge spacer  
CN41 : Terminal block of remote  
controller (3P: Blue)  
CN68 : Drain pump (3P: Blue)  
CN67 : Terminal block of power supply  
(5P: Black)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)  
CN102 :TCJ sensor (2P: Red)  
CN104 : Room temperature sensor  
(2P:Yellow)  
CN333 : Power supply of fan motor  
(5P: White)  
CN334 : Position detection of fan motor  
(5P: White)  
NOTE :  
Remove the connector by releasing  
locking of the housing.  
3) Unlock locking of the card-edge spacer  
at 6 positions to remove the control P.C.  
board.  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix the control P.C. board to the card-  
edge spacer at 6 positions.  
2) Connect the connectors removed in  
item 1 to the original positions.  
– 137 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan motor  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and 1 of  
Screws fixing electric parts box  
.  
2) Remove clamps of the lead wires con-  
nected to the following connectors of the  
control P.C. board.  
CN33 : Flap motor (5P: White)  
CN34 : Float switch (3P: Red)  
CN68 : Drain pump (3P: Blue)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)  
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P: Red)  
Screws fixing earth lead wires  
Bell mouth  
CN333 : Power supply of fan motor  
(5P: White)  
CN334 : Position detection of fan motor  
(5P: White)  
NOTE :  
Remove the connector by releasing locking  
of the housing.  
3) Remove screws fixing earth lead wire in  
the electric parts box. (Ø4 x 6, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
and remote controller cable of the termi-  
nal block.  
Turbo fan  
5) Remove screws fixing the electric parts  
box. (Ø4 x 10, 5 pcs.)  
6) Remove screws fixing the bell mouth.  
(Ø4 x 10, 6 pcs.)  
7) Remove nuts fixing the turbo fan.  
(M6, 1 pc.)  
8) Remove screws fixing holder of the motor  
lead wires to remove the motor lead wires  
from the clamp. (Ø4 x 8, 3 pcs.)  
9) Remove nuts fixing the fan motor to  
remove it.  
Motor lead holder  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix the parts, fan motor, holder of the  
motor lead, turbo fan, bell mouth, and  
electric parts box successively to their  
original positions.  
NOTE 1 :  
When fixing the turbo fan, be sure to match  
the fan boss with D-cut of the motor shaft.  
Fan motor  
NOTE 2 :  
Fix the turbo fan with torque wrench  
5.9 0.6Nm.  
2) Connect connectors, earth lead wire,  
indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable, and  
remote controller cable which have been  
disconnected in the above item 1 as  
before.  
– 138 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Drain pan  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform works of items 1 of , 1 of , 1  
of ƒ and 1 of .  
2) Remove clamps of the lead wires con-  
nected to the following connectors of the  
control P.C. board.  
CN34 : Float switch (3P: Red)  
CN68 : Drain pump (3P: Blue)  
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)  
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P: Red)  
CN333 : Power supply of fan motor  
(5P:White)  
Screws fixing earth lead wires  
Drain cap  
CN334 : Position detection of fan motor  
(5P:White)  
NOTE :  
Remove the connector by releasing locking  
of the housing.  
3) Remove screws fixing earth lead wire in  
the electric parts box. (Ø4 x 6, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable  
and remote controller cable of the termi-  
nal block.  
5) Remove screws fixing the electric parts  
box. (Ø4 x 10, 5 pcs.)  
6) Remove screws fixing the bell mouth.  
(Ø4 x 10, 6 pcs.)  
Screws fixing drain pan  
7) Remove the drain cap, and drain water  
accumulated in the drain pan.  
NOTE 1 :  
When removing the drain cap, be sure to  
prepare a bucket to catch the drained water.  
NOTE 2 :  
Thermal insulator is adhered to the drain  
cap. Be careful not to peel off the insulator.  
If the insulator has been peeled, adhere it  
with double-face tape, etc. as before.  
8) Remove screws fixing the drain pan.  
(Ø4 x 8, 4 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Fix the parts, drain cap, drain pan, bell  
mouth, and electric parts box succes-  
sively to their original positions.  
2) Connect connectors, earth lead wire,  
indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable, and  
remote controller cable which have been  
disconnected in the above item 1 as  
before.  
– 139 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
ˆ Drain pump  
1. Detachment  
assembly  
1) Perform works of items 1 of , 1 of ,  
Slide to hose side.  
1 of ƒ, 1 of and 1 of .  
2) Picking the hose band, slide it from  
pump connecting part to remove the  
drain hose.  
3) Remove screw fixing the drain pump  
assembly, slide hooking claws of the  
drain pump assembly and the main  
body (1 position), and then remove the  
assembly. (Ø4 x 8, 3 pcs.)  
Hose band  
3. Attachment  
1) Fix the drain pump assembly as before.  
Pump connecting part  
NOTE :  
The drain pump is fixed with a hook and 3  
screws. In screwing, be sure that screws  
do not to run on hooking claw at the main  
body side.  
2) Attach the drain hose and hose band  
as before.  
Hooking claw  
NOTE :  
Insert the drain hose up to the end of  
pump connecting part, and bind the white  
mark position of the hose with band.  
Fixing screw  
– 140 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Heat exchanger 1. Detachment  
1) Recover refrigerant gas.  
2) Remove refrigerant pipe at the indoor  
unit side.  
3) Perform works of items 1 of , 1 of ,  
Fixing screws  
1 of ƒ, 1 of and 1 of .  
4) Remove screws fixing the pipe cover.  
(Ø4 x 8, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove the heat exchanger by  
removing fixing band and fixing screws  
while holding the heat exchanger.  
(Ø4 x 8, 3 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
Fixing band  
1) Fix the parts, heat exchanger, fixing  
band, pipe cover, drain cap, drain pan,  
bell mouth, and electric parts box  
successively to their original positions.  
2) Connect connectors, earth lead wire,  
indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable, and  
remote controller cable which have  
been disconnected in the above item 1  
as before.  
3) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before,  
and then perform vacuuming.  
Fixing screws  
– 141 –  
15-2. Replacement of Distributor Assembly  
RAV-SM560UT-E  
1. Cutting of CapillaryTube  
A capillary tube ( 023 : Inner diameter 2mm, Length 1000mm) is brazed to a distributor assembly. Cut and  
divide the tube to each length as shown below.  
Ref No.  
No. of capillary tubes  
Cutting  
200 mm : 2 pcs.  
400 mm : 2 pcs.  
023  
4
[Cutting]  
Plane circumference of the capillary tube with  
triangle file, etc., and then break off it.  
NOTE) Break off the capillary tube so  
that inner diameter is not deformed  
2. Attachment of joint pipe  
Insert the attached joint pipe into the end of the  
capillary tube up to 15mm, and braze it.  
Form the capillary tube as same as that in the  
distributor assembly before replacement.  
3. Brazing to indoor heat exchanger  
Attach the capillary tube processed in items 1 and 2 to the end of the pipe with brazing as shown below.  
023  
142 –  
RAV-SM800UT-E  
1. Cutting of CapillaryTube  
A capillary tube ( 025 026 : Inner diameter 2mm, Length 1000mm) is brazed to a distributor assembly.  
Cut and divide the tube to each length as shown below.  
Ref No.  
No. of capillary tubes  
Cutting  
600 mm : 2 pcs.  
100 mm : 1 pc.  
300 mm : 1 pc.  
400 mm : 1 pc.  
025  
7
700 mm : 1 pc.  
800 mm : 1 pc.  
100 mm : 2 pcs.  
150 mm : 1 pc.  
500 mm : 4 pcs.  
600 mm : 2 pcs.  
900 mm : 1 pc.  
026  
10  
[Cutting]  
Plane circumference of the capillary tube with  
triangle file, etc., and then break off it.  
NOTE) Break off the capillary tube so  
2. Attachment of joint pipe  
that inner diameter is not deformed  
Insert the attached joint pipe into the end of the  
capillary tube up to 15mm, and braze it.  
Form the capillary tube as same as that in the  
distributor assembly before replacement.  
3. Brazing to indoor heat exchanger  
Attach the capillary tube processed in items 1 and 2 to the end of the pipe with brazing as shown below.  
025  
026  
143 –  
15-3. Replacement of Main Parts <Built-in type>  
RAV-SM560BT-E, SM800BT-E  
Be sure to turn off the power supply before disassembling work.  
No.  
Item  
Procedure  
1
Electric parts box 1) Remove the electric parts box.  
(Supplement: Refer to How to remove  
the electric parts box.)  
Electric parts  
fixing screw  
In this time, remove connectors of TA  
sensor, TC sensor, and TCJ sensor, if  
necessary.)  
2
Fan  
1) Remove connector of the fan motor.  
2) Remove screws fixing the fan. (Screws  
at 4 positions)  
3) Take off jointed portion of fan and  
cabinet, and then put down the fan.  
4) Loosen set screw of the Silocco fan.  
5) Remove set screw of the fan case.  
6) Remove the fan motor mounting metal,  
and then replace the fan motor.  
Fan fixing  
screw  
Electric parts  
box  
Fan  
3
Drain pan  
1) Take down the indoor unit and then  
treat the drain pan on the floor.  
Drain pan  
2) Remove screws fixing the drain pan (12  
positions) and then replace the drain  
pan.  
4
Heat exchanger  
1) Take down the indoor unit and then  
treat the heat exchanger on the floor.  
2) Remove screws fixing the drain pan (12  
positions) and then remove the drain  
pan.  
Shielding plate  
Heat exchanger  
3) Remove the shielding plate. (Screws at  
4 positions)  
4) Remove screws (at 4 positions) fixing  
the heat exchanger, and then replace  
the heat exchanger.  
5
TC sensor  
(Sensor side)  
1) Remove the check port cover.  
2) Remove the shielding plate.  
(At 4 positions)  
Shielding plate  
3) Pull out the sensors inserted into pipe  
of the heat exchanger.  
Check port cover  
144 –  
AID-P710BH, P800BH, P1120BH  
Be sure to turn off the power supply before disassembling work.  
No.  
Item  
Procedure  
1
Electric parts box 1) Remove the electric parts box.  
(Supplement: Refer to How to remove  
the electric parts box.)  
In this time, remove connectors of TA  
sensor, TC sensor, and TCJ sensor, if  
necessary.)  
Electric parts  
fixing screw  
Electric  
parts box  
2
Fan  
1) Remove connector of the fan motor.  
2) Using a hexagonal wrench, loosen  
coupling fixing screws at 2 positions,  
and then slide the fan motor to reverse  
side.  
Capacitor  
Fan case (left)  
3) Remove set screws (6 positions) of the  
fan case (left).  
4) Remove fan motor mounting metal  
(screws at 2 positions) while holding  
the fan motor with hands.  
Silocco  
fan (right)  
5) Remove capacitor fixing screw  
(1 position).  
Fan motor  
6) Take down the fan motor and the fan  
case (left).  
7) Loosen set screw of the Silocco fan.  
8) Replace the fan motor.  
3
4
Drain pan  
1) Take down the indoor unit and then  
treat the drain pan on the floor.  
2) Remove screws fixing the drain pan  
and then replace the drain pan.  
Drain pan  
Heat exchanger  
1) Take down the indoor unit and then  
treat the heat exchanger on the floor.  
Shielding plate  
Heat exchanger  
2) Remove screws fixing the drain pan  
and then remove the drain pan.  
3) Remove the shielding plate. (Screws at  
4 positions)  
4) Remove screws (at 5 positions) fixing  
the heat exchanger, and then replace  
the heat exchanger.  
5
TC sensor  
(Sensor side)  
1) Remove the check port cover.  
2) Remove the shielding plate.  
(At 4 positions)  
Shielding plate  
3) Pull out the sensors inserted into pipe  
of the heat exchanger.  
Check port  
cover  
– 145 –  
[SUPPLEMENT] How to remove the electric parts box  
Electric parts box  
The electric parts box is fixed to the indoor unit with claws at the rear side.  
Lift up it once and pull toward you. Then claws come off.  
Hook  
Procedure 2  
Remove these two screws to  
remove the electric parts box.  
Electric cable  
Remote controller cable  
Electric parts box cover  
A hole at the ceiling surface side is fixed to  
upper part of the electric parts box with claws.  
Lift up it once and pull toward you.  
Then claws come off.  
Procedure 1  
Remove these two screws to remove the electric parts box cover.  
146 –  
15-4. Replacements of Main Parts <Hi-Wall type>  
15-4-1. Indoor Unit  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
 Front panel  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and turn off  
the power supply.  
2) Push PUSHpart at the lower side of the front  
panel, and then take off claws of the front panel  
from the installation board.  
Installation board  
Front panel  
3) Open the suction grille and take off the front  
panel fixing screws (4 pcs.).  
4) After turning the side grille as shown in the right  
figure, perform the following works.  
5) Push the electric parts box with right thumb while  
pulling both sides of the front panel toward you.  
<Attachment of front panel>  
1) Turn the side grille as shown in the right figure.  
2) Push 3 positions at center of the discharge port  
and 2 positions at lower center of the discharge  
port, and then hook the hooking claws (3 posi-  
tions) at upper surface of the front panel to the  
rear board.  
Side grille  
3) Tighten 4 screws.  
Insufficient hooking or pushing may cause  
falling of dewdrop or discomforting noise.  
When removing the front panel without turning  
the side grille, the front panel may be broken.  
Upper hooking claws  
(3 positions)  
Fixing  
screws  
Fixing  
screws  
Electric parts  
1) Perform work of item 1 of .  
box assembly  
2) Remove the drain guide.  
3) Take off screws for earth lead wire attached to  
the end plate of the heat exchanger.  
4) Disconnect connectors for fan motor and louver  
motor from the microcomputer assembly.  
5) Remove the display unit at the center of the set  
from the main body.  
Screw  
Drain guide  
147 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Electric parts  
6) Take off fixing screw (1 position) of the electric  
parts base, and then pull out the electric parts  
base toward you.  
Tjc sensor position  
(Tube is attached to Tcj sensor.)  
box assembly  
7) Pull out Tc sensor and Tcj sensor from sensor  
holder of the heat exchanger. After replacement  
of the parts, incorporate two sensors without  
mistake as shown in the right figure.  
TC sensor  
position  
(Tube is attached to Tcj sensor.)  
8) After replacement of the parts, set a trap so that  
water does not enter in the electric parts assem-  
bly. (Incomplete process for lead wires may  
cause water leak.)  
ƒ Side grille  
1) Remove shaft of the side grille from the air  
conditioner body. (First remove the left shaft and  
then other shafts while sliding the side grille left  
and right.)  
Heat exchanger 1) Perform work of item .  
2) Remove pipe holder at rear side of the main  
body.  
3) Take off fixing screws (2 pcs.) at the left side of  
the end plate of the heat exchanger.  
Pipe  
holder  
Fixing screw  
Fixing  
screw  
4) Take off two fixing screws of the heat exchanger  
holder (right), and then remove the heat ex-  
changer holder (right).  
5) Take off fixing screw at lower right side of the  
heat exchanger.  
6) Remove the heat exchanger from the rear main  
body by lifting it upward.  
Fixing  
screw  
148 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
1) Perform work of item .  
Remarks  
Fan motor  
2) Perform work of item ƒ.  
3) Loosen set screw of the cross flow fan from the  
discharge port.  
4) Remove the bushing (right).  
Bushing (right)  
Set screw  
Push this  
part upward  
Cross fan  
Fixing screws  
5) Take off two fixing screws of the motor band (right).  
6) Pull out the motor band (right) and the fan motor  
outward.  
* Caution at reassembly  
Determine position of the fan motor so that connec-  
tor of the fan motor enters in the positioning rib of  
the motor band (right).  
Cross flow  
1) Perform works of items  and ƒ.  
fan  
2) Loosen set screw of the cross flow fan from the  
discharge port.  
3) Take off two fixing screws at the left side of the end  
plate of the heat exchanger, and then take off two  
fixing screws of the bearing base.  
Fixing screw  
4) Lift up slightly the left side of the heat exchanger to  
remove the bearing base.  
5) Lift up the left side of the heat exchanger toward  
you to remove the cross flow fan.  
* Caution at reassembly  
Mount the cross flow fan so that the left end of the  
first joint from right of the drift fan matches with the  
left end of the positioning rib of the rear main body.  
Positioning rib  
149 –  
15-4.2. Replacement Procedure of Service Main P.C. Board  
Replacement Procedure of Indoor Control P.C. Board  
(AIK-PXXXH series, SIK-PXXXH series)  
For this indoor control P.C. board [AIK/SIK-P SERVICE] corresponding to the common P.C. boards, follow to this  
replacement procedure when replacing P.C. board.  
(When using SIK-PXXXH series, P.C. board name, parts layout, etc. of the presently mounted P.C. board differ  
from those of this service P.C. board. However there is no problem in the functions.)  
Components  
Service P.C. board (MCC-1370A [AIK/SIK-P SERVICE] : 1 unit  
Replacement Procedure of Indoor Control P.C. Board  
:These sheets  
Replacement Record of remote controller/indoor control P.C. board/outdoor control P.C. board : 1 sheet  
Replacement Procedure  
1
2
Remove the presently mounted P.C. board from the electric parts box.  
(Be sure to send back the replaced P.C. board with Replacement Record attached separately.)  
Set Dip SW and jumpers of the service P.C. board according to the following exchange correspon-  
dence table.  
Model  
<Reference>  
AIK-PXXXH series  
AIK-P630H  
AIK-P400H  
AIK-P450H  
AIK-P500H  
AIK-P560H  
AIK-P710H  
AIK-P800H  
Service P.C. board  
Initial setup  
at shipment  
Part  
SW03  
1
2
ON  
OFF  
×
×
Match setup with one of former P.C. board.  
J01  
J07  
J09  
J11  
J12  
J14  
J15  
J16  
J17  
J19  
J22  
J24  
J25  
J36  
J50  
J53  
J54  
J55  
As it is : 〇  
Match setup with one of former P.C. board.  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : ×  
As it is : 〇  
Cut : ×  
As it is : 〇  
Cut : ×  
Cut : ×  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : ×  
As it is : 〇  
As it is : Setup of jumper of the service P.C. board is not changed.  
3
Mount P.C. board according to [Mounting].  
150 –  
[Mounting]  
In case of AIK-PXXXH series  
1. As same as P.C. board before replacement, attach a cable (Black) which is screwed to the electric parts  
box to CN240 without using a cable (Black) attached previously to CN240 of the service P.C. board.  
CN204  
Cable  
(Remove a cable  
attached previously  
to CN240 of the  
service P.C. board.)  
Service P.C. board  
2. Attach other cables as same as P.C. board before replacement.  
<(Reference) Explanation about functions of switches/jumpers>  
The following table shows the functions of the main switches and jumpers. Use as reference in miss-setup.  
Part name  
Function  
TA shift: Thermo-OFF point can be shifted in heating operation.  
Bit 1  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
Bit 2  
OFF  
ON  
Shift Q’ty  
+ 6K  
+ 4K  
1
SW03  
2
OFF  
ON  
+ 2K (Setup at shipment)  
0K  
ON  
Selection of hot start control temperature :  
The starting temperature of the fan can be raised in heating operation.  
J09  
Provided  
None  
Setup  
Normal (Setup at shipment)  
Fan starting temp up (Approx. +4K)  
J09  
Setup of filter timer  
J11  
J12  
Setup  
240 hours (Setup at shipment)  
2500 hours  
Provided  
None  
Provided  
Provided  
None  
J11  
J12  
Provided  
None  
5000 hours  
None  
Without filter timer  
151 –  
<Parts layout of service P.C. board>  
CN213 display part  
CN04 temp. sensor  
CN05 heat exchanger  
CN240  
Label  
Jumper  
SW03: TA shift  
CN230  
P.C. board (MCC-1370A)  
CN223  
Jumper  
CN231  
152 –  
15-5. Outdoor Unit  
RAV-SM560AT-E  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
CAUTION  
Remarks  
 Common  
procedure  
Valve  
cover  
Never forget to put on the gloves at  
working time, otherwise an injury will be  
caused by the parts, etc.  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and  
turn off the main switch of the breaker for  
air conditioner.  
2) Remove the valve cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.)  
After removing screw, remove the valve  
cover pulling it downward.  
Wiring  
cover  
3) Remove wiring cover (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2  
pcs.), and then remove connecting cable.  
4) Remove the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
After taking off screws, remove the  
upper cabinet pulling it upward.  
Upper cabinet  
2. Attachment  
1) Attach the waterproof cover.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to attach a waterproof cover.  
If it is not attached, there is a possibility  
that water enters inside of the outdoor unit.  
Water-proof  
cover  
Cord clamp  
2) Attach the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
Hook the rear side of the upper cabinet  
to claw of the rear cabinet, and then put  
it on the front cabinet.  
Rear cabinet  
3) Perform cabling of connecting cables, and  
fix with cord clamp.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L 3 pcs.)  
4) Attach the wiring cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
Claw  
5) Attach the valve cover.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.)  
Insert the upper part of the upper  
cabinet, set hooking claw of the valve  
cover to the slit (at three positions) of the  
main body, and then attach it pushing  
upward.  
153 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Front cabinet  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform work of item 1 of .  
Motor support  
2) Remove screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
of the front cabinet and the inverter cover.  
3) Take off screws of the front cabinet and  
the bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L 3 pcs.)  
4) Take off screws of the front cabinet and  
the motor support.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
The left side of the front side if made to  
insert to the rear cabinet, so remove it  
pulling upward.  
For single-phase type models,  
also take off this screw  
Front cabinet  
Front cabinet (Left side)  
3. Attachment  
1) Insert hook at the left side of the front side  
into the rear cabinet.  
2) Hook the lower part at the right side of the  
front to concavity of the bottom plate.  
Insert the hook of the rear cabinet into the  
slit of the front cabinet.  
Slit  
Claw  
3) Attach the removed screws to the original  
positions.  
Slit  
Hook  
Cord clamp  
Front cabinet  
Concavity at  
bottom plate  
Lower  
slit  
154 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
ƒ Inverter  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform work of item 1 of .  
Screws  
assembly  
2) Take off screws of the upper part of the  
front cabinet.  
If removing the inverter cover under this  
condition, P.C. board can be checked.  
Front cabinet  
If there is no space in the upper part of  
the upper cabinet, perform work of .  
Inverter cover  
CAUTION  
Be careful to check the inverter because  
high-voltage circuit is incorporated in it.  
3) Perform discharging by connecting + , –  
polarities by discharging resistance  
(approx. 100, 40W) or plug of soldering  
iron to + , terminals of the C14  
(printed as CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE)  
electrolytic capacitor (500µF) of P.C.  
board.  
Cord clamp  
WARNING  
The electrolytic capacitor may not nor-  
mally discharge according to error con-  
tents and the voltage may remain.There-  
fore, be sure to discharge the capacitor.  
Screws  
WARNING  
Plug of  
soldering iron  
For discharging, never use a screwdriver  
and others for short-circuiting between +  
and electrodes. As the electrolytic  
capacitor is one with a large capacity, it is  
very dangerous because a large electric  
spark will occur.  
Discharging  
position  
(Discharging  
period  
10 seconds  
or more)  
4) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
fixing the main body and the inverter box.  
Inverter  
assembly  
5) Remove various lead wires from the  
holder at upper part of the inverter box  
and wiring holder at right side of the  
terminal block.  
6) Remove the lead wire from the bundled  
part at left side of the terminal block.  
7) Pull the inverter box upward.  
8) Disconnect connectors of various lead  
wires.  
REQUIREMENT  
Remove the connectors  
with locking function by  
pushing the part indicated  
by the arrow mark.  
As each connector has a lock mechanism,  
avoid to remove the connector by holding  
the lead wire, but by holding the connector.  
155 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Control P.C.  
1) Disconnect lead wires and connectors  
connected from the control P.C. board  
assembly to other parts.  
board assembly  
Take off  
earth screws.  
1. Lead wires  
Connection with the power terminal  
block: 3 wires (Black, White, Orange)  
Earth wire: 1 wire (Black)  
2. Connectors  
Power line  
Connection with compressor:  
Remove 3P connector.  
Inverter box  
(Metal sheet)  
Connection with reactor:  
Remove the relay connectors from  
P07, 08 (2P, White) and P12, 13 (2P,  
Yellow)  
Control P.C.  
board assembly  
P.C. board base  
CN300 : Outdoor fan (3P, White)  
CN301 : Position detection (5P, White)  
CN701 : 4-way valve (3P, Yellow)  
CN600 :TE sensor (2P, White)  
CN601 :TD sensor (3P, White)  
CN603 :TS sensor (3P, White)  
CN602 :TO sensor (3P, White)  
CN500 : Case thermo. (2P, White)  
CN703 : PMV (6P, White)  
Hooking claws  
(4 positions)  
2) Remove the inverter box (Metal plate).  
3) Remove the control board assembly from  
P.C. board base. (Remove the heat sink  
and the control board assembly as they  
are screwed.)  
Control P.C.  
board assembly  
NOTES:  
1. CN300, CN301 and CN701, etc. at the  
control board assembly side are connec-  
tors with locking function.Therefore,  
remove the connector while pushing the  
part indicated by an arrow mark.  
P.C. board base  
2. Remove 4 hooking claws of P.C. board  
base, and remove upward the heat sink  
with hands.  
4) Take off 3 screws fixing the heat sink and  
main control board assembly side, and  
replace the board with a new one.  
NOTE:  
Heat sink  
Inverter box  
(Metal sheet)  
When mounting a new board, check that the  
board is correctly set in the groove of the  
base holder of P.C. board base. Attach the  
P.C. board so that the heat sink comes  
securely contact with the metal sheet.  
156 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Rear cabinet  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and , ƒ.  
2) Take off fixed screws for the bottom plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 3 pcs.)  
3) Take off fixed screws for the heat ex-  
changer. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
4) Take off fixed screw for the valve mounting  
Rear cabinet  
plate. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.)  
Fan motor  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and .  
2) Take off the flange nut fixing the fan motor  
and the propeller.  
Flange nut  
Turning it clockwise, the flange nut can  
be loosened. (To tighten the flange nut,  
turn counterclockwise.)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Disconnect the connector for fan motor  
from the inverter.  
5) Take off the fixing screws (3 pcs.) holding  
by hands so that the fan motor does not  
fall.  
Loosen the nut by  
turning clockwise  
NOTE:  
Tighten the flange nut with torque 4.9Nm  
(50kgf/cm).  
Propeller fan  
Fan  
motor  
157 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and  
, ƒ, , .  
Partition plate  
2) Discharge refrigerant gas.  
3) Remove the partition plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove the noise-insulator.  
5) Remove the terminal covers of the  
compressor, and disconnect lead  
wires of the compressor and the  
compressor thermo assembly from  
the terminal.  
6) Remove pipes connected to the  
compressor with a burner.  
Compressor  
lead  
CAUTION  
Pay attention to that flame does not  
involve 4-way valve or PMV. (If doing  
so, a malfunction may be caused.)  
Case thermo  
7) Take off the fixing screws of the  
bottom plate and heat exchanger.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
Heat exchanger  
8) Take off the fixing screws of the valve  
clamping plate to the bottom plate.  
Remove  
(Discharge pipe)  
9) Pull upward he refrigerating cycle.  
10) Take off nut fixing the compressor  
to the bottom place.  
Remove  
(Suction pipe)  
Screw  
Valve  
support board  
CAUTION  
When reconnecting the lead wires to  
the compressor terminals after  
replacement of the compressor, be  
sure to caulk the Faston terminal  
without loosening.  
Screws (2 pcs.)  
Compressor bolt (3 pcs.)  
ˆ Reactor  
1) Perform works of item 1 of  and ƒ.  
Partition  
plate  
2) First take off two screws (ST1T Ø4 x  
10L) of the reactor fixed to the reactor  
support.  
Reactor  
Reactor  
support board  
3) Remove the reactor support from the  
partition plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 4 pcs.)  
4) Take off two screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L)  
directly attached to the partition plate.  
158 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Pulse Modulating 1. Detachment  
Valve (PMV) coil  
1) Perform works of items  and .  
Positioning extrusion  
PMV body  
2) Release the coil from the concavity by  
turning it, and remove coil from the  
PMV.  
2. Attachment  
1) Put the coil deep into the bottom  
position.  
2) Fix the coil firmly by turning it to the  
concavity.  
Concavity  
PMV coil  
Š Fan guard  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform works of items 1 of , and .  
Minus screwdriver  
2) Remove the front cabinet, and put it  
down so that fan guard side directs  
downward.  
CAUTION  
Perform works on a corrugated card-  
board, cloth, etc. to prevent flaw on the  
product.  
3) Remove the hooking claws by pushing  
with minus screwdriver along with the  
arrow mark in the right figure, and  
remove the fan guard.  
Front cabinet  
Hooking claw  
Front cabinet  
2. Attachment  
1) Insert claws of the fan guard in the hole  
of the front cabinet. Push the hooking  
claws (10 positions) with hands and  
then fix the claws.  
CAUTION  
All the attaching works have completed.  
Check that all the hooking claws are  
fixed to the specified positions.  
Fan guard  
159 –  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
CAUTION  
Remarks  
 Common  
procedure  
Never forget to put on the gloves at  
working time, otherwise an injury will be  
caused by the parts, etc.  
Front  
cabinet  
1. Detachment  
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and  
also turn off switch of the breaker.  
2) Remove the front panel.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 3 pcs.)  
After taking off screws, remove the front  
panel by pulling it downward.  
3) Disconnect the connecting cables and  
power cord from the terminals and cord  
clamp.  
Upper plate  
of cabinet  
4) Remove the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 6 pcs.)  
2. Attachment  
1) Attach the waterproof cover.  
Water-proof  
cove  
CAUTION  
Be sure to attach a waterproof cover.  
If it is not attached, there is a possibility  
that water enters inside of the outdoor unit.  
2) Attach the upper cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 6 pcs.)  
3) Connect the connecting cable and power  
cord at the terminal and fix them with cord  
clamp.  
CAUTION  
Using bundling band sold at a market, be  
sure to fix the power cables and indoor/  
outdoor connecting cables along the inter-  
unit cable so that they do not come to  
contact with the compressor, valves and  
cables at gas side, and the discharge pipe.  
4) Attach the front cabinet.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 3 pcs.)  
160 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Discharge port 1. Detachment  
cabinet  
1) Perform work of item 1 of .  
Side cabinet  
Inverter  
2) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 3 pcs.) of  
discharge port cabinet for the partition  
plate.  
3) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.) of  
discharge port cabinet for the bottom  
plate.  
4) Take off screw (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.) of  
discharge port cabinet for the heat ex-  
changer.  
Fin guard  
5) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.) of  
discharge port cabinet for the fin guard.  
2. Attachment  
1) Put the upper left side of the discharge  
port cabinet on the end plate of the heat  
exchanger, and then fix it with screw.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.)  
2) Attach the removed screws to the original  
positions.  
Discharge port  
End plate of the  
heat exchanger  
ƒ Side cabinet  
1) Perform work of item 1 of .  
2) Remove screw fixing the inverter and the  
side cabinet. (ST1T Ø4 x 10, 1 pc.)  
3) Remove screws of the side cabinet and  
the valve support plate.  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove screw of the side cabinet and the  
cabling panel (Rear).  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10, 1 pc.)  
5) Remove screw of the side cabinet and the  
bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 x 10, 1 pc.)  
Valve support plate  
Inverter  
Side cabinet  
6) Remove screw of the side cabinet and the  
fin guard (Heat exchanger).  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10, 2 pcs.)  
Side cabinet  
Valve support  
plate  
Cabling panel  
(Rear)  
161 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Inverter  
1) Perform works of items of 1) to 5) of .  
assembly  
Screw  
2) Take off screw (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.) of  
the upper left part of the inverter cover.  
Inverter  
assembly  
If removing the inverter cover under this  
condition, P.C. board can be checked.  
If there is no space in the upper part of  
the upper cabinet, perform works of  
items 6) to 7) of (1) and remove the  
partition fixing plate.  
Holder  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 1 pc.)  
CAUTION  
Be careful to check the inverter because  
high-voltage circuit is incorporated in it.  
Inverter  
cover  
3) Perform discharging by connecting the  
discharging resistance (approx. 100,  
40W) or plug of soldering iron to + , –  
terminals of the C10 too 13 (printed as  
CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE) electrolytic  
capacitor (760µF) of P.C. board.  
Inverter  
assembly  
Plug of  
soldering iron  
WARNING  
The electrolytic capacitor may not nor-  
mally discharge according to error con-  
tents and the voltage may remain.There-  
fore, be sure to discharge the capacitor.  
Left time:  
10 sec. or more  
WARNING  
Inverter assembly  
For discharging, never use a screwdriver  
and others for short-circuiting between +  
and electrodes. As the electrolytic  
capacitor is one with a large capacity, it is  
very dangerous because a large electric  
spark will occur.  
4) Remove various lead wires from the  
holder at upper part of the inverter box.  
5) Remove the hook for the partition plate  
(lower left side).  
6) Remove the hook for the side cabinet  
(lower left side) and the screw, and lift up  
the inverter assembly upward. (ST1T Ø4 x  
10L, 1 pc.) In this time, cut off the band  
bundling each lead wire.  
Hook for the side  
cabinet (lower left side)  
Screw  
7) Disconnect connectors of various lead  
wires.  
Remove the connectors  
with locking function by  
pushing the part indicated  
by the arrow mark.  
REQUIREMENT  
As each connector has a lock mechanism,  
avoid to remove the connector by holding  
the lead wire, but by holding the connector.  
162 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Control P.C.  
board  
1) Remove the inverter box from P.C. board base.  
Inverter box (Metal sheet)  
2) Disconnect lead wires and connectors con-  
nected from the control P.C. board assembly to  
other parts.  
assembly  
1. Lead wires:  
With the power terminal block: 2 pcs.  
(Single phase) (Red, White)  
With the compressor: 3 pcs.  
(Red, White, Black)  
P.C. board  
base  
2. Connectors  
CN301 : Outdoor fan (3P, White) *Note 1)  
CN300 : Position detection (5P, White)  
CN700 : 4-way valve (3P, Yellow) *Note 1)  
CN702 : PMV coil (6P, White)  
Cycle control  
P.C. board  
assembly  
Inverter  
CN600 :TD sensor (3P, White)  
control  
P.C. board  
assembly  
CN605 :TS sensor (3P, White) *Note 1)  
CN604 :TE sensor (2P, White) *Note 1)  
CN601 :TO sensor (2P, White)  
CN02 : Indoor/Outdoor connecting  
terminal block (2P, Black)  
Cycle control  
P.C. board  
assembly  
CN500 : Case thermo (2P, White) *Note 1)  
CN14, CN15 : Reactor (3P, Relay  
connector, Blue) *Note 1)  
*Note 1)  
Remove the connector while releasing locking of  
the housing.  
3) Remove the control P.C. board assembly from  
P.C. board base. (Remove the heat sink and  
the inverter control P.C. board assembly as  
they are screwed.)  
Inverter  
control  
P.C. board  
assembly  
Note 2)  
Remove the heat sink upward by taking off two  
claws of P.C. base and holding the heat sink.  
Inverter  
control  
4) Take off three screws fixing the heat sink to the  
control P.C. board assembly.  
P.C. board  
assembly  
5) Mount a new control P.C. board assembly.  
Note 3)  
Groove for  
P.C. boaed  
When mounting a new board, check that it is  
correctly set in the groove of the base holder of  
P.C. board base.  
Inverter box  
(Metal sheet)  
Heat sink  
163 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Fan motor  
1) Perform works of items 1) to 5), 7) of   
2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor  
and the propeller fan.  
Flange  
nut  
Loosen the flange nut by turning clock-  
wise. (To tighten the flange nut, turn it  
counterclockwise.)  
3) Remove the propeller fan.  
4) Remove the lead wire from the hook fixing  
the fan motor lead wires on the motor  
base. (Three positions)  
5) Disconnect the connector for fan motor  
from the inverter.  
Loosen by turning  
clockwise  
6) Take off the fixing screws (4 pcs.) while  
holding by hands so that the fan motor  
does not fall.  
NOTE :  
Tighten the flange nut with torque 9.8Nm  
(100kgf/cm).  
Propeller fan  
Fan motor  
Fixing claws for  
fan motor lead  
wires (3 positions)  
Motor base  
164 –  
No. Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Compressor 1) Perform works of items , , ƒ, , and  
.  
Motor  
base  
2) Evacuate refrigerant gas.  
3) Disconnect the connector for fan motor from  
the inverter.  
4) Take off screws fixing the motor base to the  
bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
5) Remove the motor base together with the  
fan motor and the propeller fan.  
6) Take off screws fixing the partition plate to  
the valve support plate.  
Partition plate  
(ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
7) Remove the valve support plate.  
(M6 x 4 pcs.)  
8) Take off screws of the partition plate and the  
bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
9) Take off screws of the partition plate and the  
heat exchanger. (ST1T Ø4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
Valve support  
Screw  
10) Remove the noise-insulator.  
11) Remove the terminal covers of the com-  
pressor, and disconnect lead wires of the  
compressor and the compressor thermo  
assembly from the terminal.  
12) Remove pipes connected to the compres-  
sor with a burner.  
Partition  
plate  
CAUTION  
Pay attention to that flame does not involve  
4-way valve or PMV. (If doing so, a malfunc-  
tion may be caused.)  
Valve  
support  
13) Pull the refrigerating cycle upward.  
14) Take off nut fixing the compressor on the  
bottom plate. (3 pcs.)  
15) Pull the compressor toward you.  
CAUTION  
Compressor  
lead wire  
When reconnecting the lead wires to the  
compressor terminals after replacement of  
the compressor, be sure to caulk the Faston  
terminal without loosening.  
Case thermo  
Remove  
(Discharge  
pipe)  
Remove  
(Suction  
pipe)  
Compressor  
nut (3 pcs.)  
165 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
ˆ Reactor  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and .  
2) Take off screws fixing the reactor.  
(Ø4 x 10L , 2 pcs. per one reactor.  
An outdoor unit has two reactors on the  
partition plate.)  
Partition plate  
Screws  
Reactor  
Pulse Modulating 1. Detachment  
Valve (PMV) coil  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and ƒ.  
2) Remove the coil from PMV body while  
pulling it upward.  
Positioning extrusion  
PMV body  
2. Attachment  
1) Match the positioning extrusion of the coil  
surely to the concavity of PMV body to fix it.  
Concavity  
PMV coil  
166 –  
No.  
Part name  
Procedure  
Remarks  
Š Fan guard  
1. Detachment  
1) Perform works of items 1 of  and .  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
2) Remove the air flow cabinet, and put it  
down so that the fan guard side directs  
downward.  
Bell mouth  
Perform work on a corrugated card-  
board, cloth, etc. to prevent flaw to the  
product.  
Remove  
two screws  
3) Take off screws fixing the bell mouth.  
(ST1Tf4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
4) Remove the bell mouth.  
Bell mouth  
5) Remove the hooking claws by pushing  
with minus screwdriver along with the  
arrow mark as shown in right figure.  
Discharge  
port cabinet  
2. Attachment  
1) Insert claw of the fan guard in hole of the  
discharge panel. Push the hooking claws  
(5 positions) with hands and fix the claws.  
Minus screwdriver  
Fan guard  
After all the attachment works are  
completed, check that all the hooking  
claws are fixed to the specified posi-  
tions.  
2) Mount the bell mouth by hooking three  
claws at upper side of the bell mouth in the  
slits on the discharge cabinet.  
3) After attachment, fix the bell mouth with  
screws. (ST1Tf4 x 10L, 2 pcs.)  
Hooking claw  
Discharge port cabinet  
Slit (3 positions)  
Bell mouth  
Claw (3 positions)  
167 –  
16. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST  
16-1. Indoor Unit  
4-Way Air Discharge Cassette Type  
RAV-SM560UT-E/RAV-SM800UT-E  
209  
229  
CODE No.  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
SETTINGTEST R.C. No.  
225  
208  
202  
226  
UNIT  
SET CL  
224  
210  
201  
207  
215,216,217,  
218,221,222  
203,204  
211,212,213,  
214,219,220  
223  
227,228  
206  
Location  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
201  
43121703 Pump, Drain, ADP-1409,  
220-240V  
216  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
43194078 Nut, Flare, 5/8 IN, Ø15.88  
43194080 Socket, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194079 Socket, 5/8 IN, Ø15.88  
43049697 Bonnet, Ø6.35  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
43120215 Fan, Ass’y Turbo, TJ461  
4314J122 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
4314J123 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
4318T313 Owner’s Manual  
43047609 Bonnet, Ø9.52  
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194029 Bonnet, Ø15.88  
43172160 Pan Ass’y, Drain,  
PS-F+ABS, Sheet  
43019904 Holder, Sensor, SUS  
43170231 Hose, Drain  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
215  
43151279 Switch, Float, FS-0218-106  
43121692 Motor, Fan, SWF-230-60-1  
43170232 Hose, Drain, 25A  
43139137 Rubber, Cushion  
43097204 Nut  
43079249 Band, Hose  
43147656 Distributor Ass’y  
43047545 Nut, Flare, 1/4 IN, Ø6.35  
43047546 Nut, Flare, 3/8 IN, Ø9.52  
43194051 Socket, Ø6.35  
43147657 Distributor Ass’y  
4316V194 Remote Controller, SX-A3JE  
4316V195 Remote Controller, SX-A11JE  
4316V196 Remote Controller, WX-W2JE  
4316V197 Remote Controller, WH-H1JE  
43194026 Socket, Ø9.52  
43194081 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194081 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
– 168 –  
402  
404  
401  
405  
403  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
401  
402  
403  
404  
43060750 Terminal Block, 3P  
43050382 Sensor, TC (F6)  
43150297 Sensor, TC  
43160445 Terminal Block, 2P,  
1A, AC30V  
405  
4316V188 P.C. Board Ass’y, MMC-1402  
– 169 –  
Concealed Duct Type  
RAV-SM560BT-E/RAV-SM800BT-E  
230,231  
202,203  
210,211,214,  
215,218,219  
204  
227  
CODE No.  
212,213,216,  
217,220,221  
SET DATA  
UNIT No.  
SETTINGTEST R.C. No.  
224,225  
UNIT  
201  
SET CL  
208,209  
222  
206,207  
Location  
No.  
Location  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
43120149 Fan, Multi Blade  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
43049697 Bonnet, Ø6.35  
43047609 Bonnet, Ø9.52  
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194029 Bonnet, Ø15.88  
43019822 Holder, Sensor, SUS  
43160394 Connector, 9P  
4314J100 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
4314J101 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
43147654 Distributor Ass’y  
43147655 Distributor Ass’y  
43121643 Motor, Fan  
43121645 Motor, Fan  
43155088 Capacitor, Electrolytic,  
2.5MFD, 500V  
43191304 Drain Ass’y  
225  
226  
43155096 Capacitor, Electrolytic,  
5MFD, 400V  
43191305 Pan, Drain  
43047545 Nut, Flare, 1/4 IN, Ø6.35  
43047546 Nut, Flare, 3/8 IN, Ø9.52  
43194081 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194078 Nut, Flare, 5/8 IN, Ø15.88  
43194051 Socket, Ø6.35  
43121688 Pump, Drain, PJD-05230TF,  
220-240V 50/60Hz  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
4316V194 Remote Controller, SX-A3JE  
4316V195 Remote Controller, SX-A11JE  
4316V196 Remote Controller, WX-W2JE  
43119462 Filter (SM560BT-E)  
43194026 Socket, Ø9.52  
43194080 Socket, 1/2 IN, Ø12.7  
43194079 Socket, 5/8 IN, Ø15.88  
43119463 Filter (SM800BT-E)  
– 170 –  
403  
402  
401  
406  
404  
405  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
401  
402  
403  
404  
43060750 Terminal Block, 3P  
43050382 Sensor, TC (F6)  
43150299 Sensor, TA  
43160445 Terminal Block, 2P,  
1A, AC30V  
405  
406  
4316V189 P.C. Board Ass’y,  
MCC-1403 (220-240V)  
43158180 Transformer, TT-09  
(AC220-240V)  
– 171 –  
RBC-U21PG(W) - E  
304  
311  
312  
306  
307  
305  
301  
303  
310  
308  
313  
302  
309  
Location  
Part  
Location  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
No.  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
43409164 Panel, PS-HI100  
43480010 Air Filter, ABS  
308  
309  
310  
43407116 Grille, Catch, ABS  
43409168 Grille, Air, Inlet  
43407120 Outlet, Air Form, PS-F  
4302C029 Motor, Louver, MP24GA  
43409173 Louver, ABS  
43409182 Cover, Panel Ass’y,  
PS-HI100  
311  
312  
313  
43407123 Fix, Motor, ABS  
43460108 Lead, Motor  
43482025 Washer, SPCC  
43422001 Joint, Kit  
43422002 Joint, Kit  
– 172 –  
High-Wall Type  
220  
219  
232  
221  
213  
229  
218  
216  
211  
222  
227  
201  
205  
228  
230  
208  
209  
231  
226  
217  
203  
224 225  
223  
212  
210  
207  
204  
236  
233  
202  
206  
Location  
No.  
Location  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
43T00355 Front Panel Ass’y  
43T00356 Grille Ass’y  
43T80014 Air Filter, (L)  
43T80013 Air Filter, (R)  
43T80003 Filter, Frame  
43T01004 Mark  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
236  
43T19003 Holder, Sensor  
43T49009 Spring  
43T49036 Plate, EVA, Seal  
43T49039 Holder, Plate EVA, Seal (U)  
43T49038 Plate EVA, Seal (D)  
43T49037 Holder, Plate EVA, Seal (D)  
43T79007 Guide, Drain  
43T03010 Body, Right  
43T03011 Body, Left  
43T39016 Fix Motor  
43T03012 Hide, Claw  
43T09317 Grille, Horizontal  
43T70301 Hose Ass’y, Drain  
43T60075 Fan Motor Cord  
43T21327 Motor, Fan, ICF-340-30-2  
43T20014 Fan, Cross Flow  
43T22008 Bearing  
43T21302 Motor, Stepping, MP35EA12  
43T44316 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
(SM560KRT-E)  
43T39015 Base, Bearing  
43T03305 Back Body Ass’y  
43T07022 Holder, Pipe  
213  
42T44317 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y  
(SM800KRT-E)  
43T82007 Plate, Installation  
43T85400 Owner’s Manual  
43T62029 Cover, Terminal  
216  
216  
43T11002 Pipe, Shield  
43T11306 Pipe, Shield (SM800KRT-E)  
– 173 –  
RAV-SM560KRT-E/RAV-SM800KRT-E  
411  
410  
406  
408  
402  
401  
413  
412  
404  
404  
403  
Location  
No.  
Location  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
401  
402  
403  
404  
406  
408  
410  
43T60047 Terminal, 3P  
410  
43T69347 P.C. Board, Ass’y, MCC-  
1370A, MCC-1370B  
43T60320 Terminal, 3P  
(SM800KRT-E)  
43T60321 Terminal, 2P  
411  
412  
413  
43T69325 P.C. Board, Ass’y, AI, MCC-  
1337  
43T50304 Temperature Sensor, TC, TCJ  
43T69005 Sensor, Thermostat, TA  
43T58302 Transformer, TT-02  
43T69066 P.C. Board Ass’y, WRS-LED,  
MCC-819-02  
43T69346 P.C. Board, Ass’y, MCC-  
1370A, MCC-1370B  
43162047 Cord clamp  
(SM560KRT-E)  
– 174 –  
16-2
4
RAV-
31  
INVERTER  
11  
25  
17  
2
30  
13,14  
10  
29  
9
18  
7
8
28  
21,  
22  
23,  
24  
6
26  
27  
12  
3
15  
16  
20  
5
19  
1
Location  
No.  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
18  
19  
43146617 Solenoid, Coil, LB64045  
1
2
43105037 Cabinet, Front, PCM  
43100239 Cabinet, Back, PCM  
43042468 Base, Ass’y  
43046385 Valve, Pulse, Modulating,  
SKV-18D26  
3
20  
43046394 Coil, PMV, DKV-  
MOZS744BO  
4
43005508 Cabinet, UP, PCM  
43119460 Guard, Fan, PP  
5
21  
22  
23  
43046392 Valve, Packed, 6.35, AO  
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN  
6
43119448 Cover, Packed, Valve  
43062230 Cover, Wiring, Ass’y  
43047667 Nut, Flange  
7
43046393 Valve, Packed, 12.7, HKU-  
R410A-H4  
8
9
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421  
4302C033 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-1  
4314G128 Condenser, Ass’y  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN, 6.4 CU  
43055521 Reactor, CH-57  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
43063321 Holder, Sensor, 4-8, 9.52  
43063322 Holder, Sensor, 6-11.4, 12.7  
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8  
43063332 Holder, Sensor  
43041609 Compressor, DA130A1F-23F  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43097206 Bolt, Compressor, M6  
43049749 Rubber, Cushion  
43089160 Cap, Waterproof  
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
43046363 Valve, 4-WAY, VT7101D  
– 175 –  
702  
TE Sensor  
TS Sensor  
TO Sensor  
TD Sensor  
701  
705  
703  
704  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
701  
702  
43050334 Sensor, TD (F4),  
TD Sensor  
43050382 Sensor, TC (F6),  
TC Sensor  
703  
704  
43062228 Base, P.C. Board, ABS  
43160469 Terminal Block, 6P,  
AC250V, 20A  
706  
4316V182 P.C. Board Ass’y,  
MCC-813  
– 176 –  
Revised 3/June/2004  
RAV-SM800AT-E  
4
5
11  
10  
38  
37  
9
8
2
32  
21,22  
36  
24  
23  
34  
7
35  
30  
14  
1
6
31  
3
13  
27  
19  
25  
28  
29  
18  
15  
16,17  
33  
26  
20  
12  
Location  
Part  
No.  
Description  
Part  
Description  
No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
43191634 Cabinet, Air Outled  
43191636 Cabinet, Front, Ass’y  
43191635 Cabinet, Side, Ass’y  
43191637 Panel, Upper  
22  
23  
24  
43046348 Coil, Solenoid,  
VHV-01A150A1  
43046385 Valve, Pulse, Modulating,  
SKV-18D26  
43046386 Coil, PMV,  
DKV-MO25743BO  
43048066 Accumulator Ass’y  
43005489 Guard, Fin  
43191630 Guard, Fan, PP-K  
43122065 Bell Mouth, Plastic  
43047667 Nut, Flange  
25  
26  
43146584 Valve, Packed, 9.52DIA,  
HKT9.52  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
43047401 Bonnet, 3/8 IN, 9.52 CU  
43146613 Valve, Ball, B5/8F  
Bonnet  
43148169 Strainer  
43148176 Strainer  
9
Fan, Propeller, PJ491, AS-G  
43121693 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-63-1  
4314G117 Condenser, Ass’y  
43191515 Panel, Front, Piping  
43191605 Panel, Back, Piping  
43119390 Hanger  
43041772 Compressor Ass’y  
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal  
43063317 Holder, Thermostat  
43005482 Base Ass’y  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
43058266 Reactor, CH-47-Z-K  
43063321 Holder, Sensor,  
4-8, 9.52  
34  
35  
43063322 Holder, Sensor,  
6-11.4, 12.7  
43063325 Holder, Sensor,  
6-6.35, 8  
43049739 Cushion, Rubber  
43097204 Nut  
36  
37  
38  
43063332 Holder, Sensor  
43032441 Nipple, Drain  
43058268 Reactor, CH-43-Z-K  
43046344 Valve, 4-WAY, CHV-0213  
– 177 –  
INVERTER COVER  
708,709  
702  
701  
TO Sensor  
706  
TE Sensor  
TS Sensor  
TD Sensor  
INVERTER BOX  
707  
704  
703,705  
Location  
Part  
Description  
No.  
701  
702  
704  
43050334 Sensor, TD (F4), TD Sensor  
43050382 Sensor, TC (F6), TC Sensor  
43160469 Terminal Block, 6P,  
AC250V, 20A  
705  
707  
43162042 Base, P.C. Board, ABS  
4316V183 P.C. Board Ass’y, CDB,  
MCC-1398  
708  
4316V184 P.C. Board Ass’y, IPDU,  
MCC-1359  
– 178 –  
RAV-SM560XT-E/RAV-SM800XT-E  
220  
222  
224  
217  
227  
218  
214  
207  
208  
223  
216  
208  
212  
203  
219  
235  
204  
206  
202  
221  
225  
226  
213  
211  
229  
228  
210  
215  
233  
231  
209  
205  
235  
234  
201  
230  
232  
Location  
No.  
Location  
No.  
Part  
Description  
Part  
Description  
201  
202  
203  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
219  
43T09312 Air Inlet Grille  
43T00357 Panel Arm Ass’y  
43T00361 Front Panel Ass’y  
43T00358 Front Panel Ass’y  
43T01004 Mark  
220  
221  
222  
223  
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
231  
232  
232  
232  
232  
233  
234  
235  
43T09314 Vertical Louver  
43T49303 Pipe Holder  
43T19304 Cover Body L  
43T19305 Cover Body R  
43T19306 Cover Body LD  
43T19307 Bush Body R  
43T19308 Bush Body D  
43T82302 Installation Plate  
43T60314 Terminal Cover  
43T62303 Connector Cover  
43T79303 Drain Band  
43T80302 Air Filter  
43T00359 Cap Screw C  
43T00360 Cap Screw LR  
43T20303 Fan Cover  
43T20304 Motor Band Ass’y  
43T20305 Multiblade Fan  
43T19309 Screw Set (D-T)  
43T21325 Fan Motor  
43T83003 Remote Controller Holder  
43T69309 Wireless Remote Controller  
43T69310 Wireless Remote Controller  
43T85335 Owner’s Manual  
43T72301 Drain Pan Ass’y  
43T79304 Drain Hose Ass’y  
43T19303 Lover Motor Ass’y  
43T09313 Horizontal Louver  
43T85336 Owner’s Manual  
43T85337 Owner’s Manual  
43T85341 Owner’s Manual  
43T49304 Flexible pipe, Ø12.70, Ass’y  
43T80003 Filter Flame  
43T44319 Refrigeration Ass’y, Ø12.70  
43T03303 Back Body Ass’y  
43T00365 Grille Stopper Ass’y  
– 179 –  
401  
403  
402  
404  
405  
406  
407  
408  
Location  
Part  
Description  
No.  
401  
401  
401  
401  
402  
43T69311 P.C. Board  
43T69312 P.C. Board  
43T69313 P.C. Board  
43T69314 P.C. Board  
43T50004 Temperature Sensor  
– 180 –  

Opti Ups Charger Station User Manual
Panasonic Cw Xc125hu User Manual
Panasonic Kx Flb758hk User Manual
Ricoh Priport Jp1250 User Manual
Samsung Us18a9 0 Rcf User Manual
Sanyo N 1u User Manual
Smc Networks Robo Cylinder Rgs5c User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner Sg Wac 12ese C User Manual
Sony Found Not Kdl 46w4150 User Manual
Whirlpool X05002v0 User Manual